#$@%#$%!

Ngiler SH3LL 360
: / usr / share / vim / vim80 / doc /

Information Server
MySQL : OFF Perl : OFF CURL : ON WGET : OFF PKEXEC : OFF

Directive	Local Value
IP Address	162.0.209.101
System	Linux premium169.web-hosting.com 4.18.0-553.50.1.lve.el8.x86_64 #1 SMP Thu Apr 17 19:10:24 UTC 2025 x86_64
User	luxeelil
PHP Version	8.0.30
Software	LiteSpeed
Doc root	Writable

Edit File : syntax.txt \| Size : 212.37 KB
syntax.txt For Vim version 8.0. Last change: 2018 Jan 31 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar Syntax highlighting syntax syntax-highlighting coloring Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that. Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the GUI version, gvim. In the User Manual: \|usr_06.txt\| introduces syntax highlighting. \|usr_44.txt\| introduces writing a syntax file. 1. Quick start \|:syn-qstart\| 2. Syntax files \|:syn-files\| 3. Syntax loading procedure \|syntax-loading\| 4. Syntax file remarks \|:syn-file-remarks\| 5. Defining a syntax \|:syn-define\| 6. :syntax arguments \|:syn-arguments\| 7. Syntax patterns \|:syn-pattern\| 8. Syntax clusters \|:syn-cluster\| 9. Including syntax files \|:syn-include\| 10. Synchronizing \|:syn-sync\| 11. Listing syntax items \|:syntax\| 12. Highlight command \|:highlight\| 13. Linking groups \|:highlight-link\| 14. Cleaning up \|:syn-clear\| 15. Highlighting tags \|tag-highlight\| 16. Window-local syntax \|:ownsyntax\| 17. Color xterms \|xterm-color\| 18. When syntax is slow \|:syntime\| {Vi does not have any of these commands} Syntax highlighting is not available when the \|+syntax\| feature has been disabled at compile time. ============================================================================== 1. Quick start :syn-qstart :syn-enable :syntax-enable This command switches on syntax highlighting: > :syntax enable What this command actually does is to execute the command > :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find the path in another way (see \|$VIMRUNTIME\|). Usually this works just fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files are in the "/usr/vim/vim50/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to "/usr/vim/vim50". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim. This command also sources the \|menu.vim\| script when the GUI is running or will start soon. See \|'go-M'\| about avoiding that. :syn-on :syntax-on The `:syntax enable` command will keep your current color settings. This allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the defaults, use: > :syntax on < :hi-normal :highlight-normal If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background with: > :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White For a color terminal see \|:hi-normal-cterm\|. For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see \|syncolor\|. NOTE: The syntax files on MS-DOS and Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>. The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of file for your system. Although on MS-DOS and Windows the right format is automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty. NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after reading the \|gvimrc\|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the \|gvimrc\|: > :gui " open window and set default for 'background' :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors NOTE: Using ":gui" in the \|gvimrc\| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the foreground! Use ":gui -f" then. g:syntax_on You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: > :if exists("g:syntax_on") \| syntax off \| else \| syntax enable \| endif To put this into a mapping, you can use: > :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar> \ syntax off <Bar> \ else <Bar> \ syntax enable <Bar> \ endif <CR> [using the \|<>\| notation, type this literally] Details: The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how this works, look in the file: command file ~ :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim Also see \|syntax-loading\|. NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value. ============================================================================== 2. Syntax files :syn-files The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters, a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem). Examples: c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one, for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: > :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: > :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim. MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES mysyntaxfile When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these automatically with ":syntax enable", do this: 1. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: > mkdir ~/.vim 2. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: > mkdir ~/.vim/syntax 3. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: > :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim Now you can start using your syntax file manually: > :set syntax=mine You don't have to exit Vim to use this. If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see \|new-filetype\|. If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'. ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE mysyntaxfile-add If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps: 1. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above. 2. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: > mkdir ~/.vim/after mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax 3. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For example, to change the colors for the C syntax: > highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green 4. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: > :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be different. You don't even have to restart Vim. If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name. All the ".vim" files in this directory will be used, for example: ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE mysyntaxfile-replace* If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new version, follow the same steps as for \|mysyntaxfile\| above. Just make sure that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'. Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets b:current_syntax. NAMING CONVENTIONS group-name {group-name} E669 W18 A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color. A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself. The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]". However, Vim does not give an error when using other characters. To be able to allow each user to pick his favorite set of colors, there must be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages. These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"): Comment any comment Constant any constant String a string constant: "this is a string" Character a character constant: 'c', '\n' Number a number constant: 234, 0xff Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10 Identifier any variable name Function function name (also: methods for classes) Statement any statement Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc. Repeat for, do, while, etc. Label case, default, etc. Operator "sizeof", "+", "", etc. Keyword any other keyword Exception try, catch, throw PreProc generic Preprocessor Include preprocessor #include Define preprocessor #define Macro same as Define PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc. Type int, long, char, etc. StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc. Structure struct, union, enum, etc. Typedef A typedef Special any special symbol SpecialChar special character in a constant Tag you can use CTRL-] on this Delimiter character that needs attention SpecialComment special things inside a comment Debug debugging statements Underlined text that stands out, HTML links Ignore left blank, hidden \|hl-Ignore\| Error any erroneous construct Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the keywords TODO FIXME and XXX The names marked with are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups. For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting. The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file. Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string" can be used for the same group. The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name: NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained hl-Ignore When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal mechanism. See \|conceal\|. ============================================================================== 3. Syntax loading procedure syntax-loading This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are located. This is used here as the variable \|$VIMRUNTIME\|. ":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following: Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim \| +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim \| +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath' \| \| \| +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is \| \| defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise \| \| ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules \| \| existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't \| \| set yet. \| \| \| +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when \| \| the 'syntax' option is set. synload-1 \| \| \| +- Source the user's optional file, from the \|mysyntaxfile\| variable. \| This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. synload-2 \| +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any \| filetype.vim files found. It should always Source \| $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following. \| \| \| +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option \| \| This is where the connection between file name and file type is \| \| made for known file types. synload-3 \| \| \| +- Source the user's optional file, from the myfiletypefile \| \| variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. \| \| synload-4 \| \| \| +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file \| \| type was detected yet. synload-5 \| \| \| +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. \|menu.vim\| \| +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file \| type has been detected. synload-6 \| +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each already loaded buffer. Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows: Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands. \| +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from \|synload-3\| \| (known file types) or \|synload-4\| (user's file types), the 'filetype' \| option is set to the file type. \| +- The autocommand at \|synload-5\| is triggered. If the file type was not \| found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This \| should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following. \| \| \| +- Source the user's optional file, from the myscriptsfile \| \| variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. \| \| \| +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file, \| again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the \| file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'. \| +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this \| triggers the FileType autocommand \|synload-6\| above. It sets \| 'syntax' to the determined file type. \| +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand \| from \|synload-1\| (and \|synload-2\|). This find the main syntax file in \| 'runtimepath', with this command: \| runtime! syntax/<name>.vim \| +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific syntax. ============================================================================== 4. Syntax file remarks :syn-file-remarks b:current_syntax-variable Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the "b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: > :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh" :au BufReadPost * do-some-things :au BufReadPost * endif 2HTML 2html.vim convert-to-HTML This is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file. After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. With \|g:html_line_ids\| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123 or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with \|g:html_dynamic_folds\| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded in Vim. You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"! Source the script to convert the current file: > :runtime! syntax/2html.vim < Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using \|:unlet\|. Remarks: - Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors. - From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)! - The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in. Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a Unix shell: > for f in .[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done < g:html_start_line* g:html_end_line To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the \|:TOhtml\| command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first and last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: > :let g:html_start_line = line("'<") :let g:html_end_line = line("'>") :runtime! syntax/2html.vim < :TOhtml :[range]TOhtml The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin. This command will source \|2html.vim\| for you. When a range is given, this command sets \|g:html_start_line\| and \|g:html_end_line\| to the start and end of the range, respectively. Default range is the entire buffer. If the current window is part of a \|diff\|, unless \|g:html_diff_one_file\| is set, :TOhtml will convert all windows which are part of the diff in the current tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element in the generated HTML. With \|g:html_line_ids\| you can jump to lines in specific windows with (for example) #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or #W3L87 for line 87 in the third. Examples: > :10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html :'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection :TOhtml " convert entire buffer < g:html_diff_one_file Default: 0. When 0, and using \|:TOhtml\| all windows involved in a \|diff\| in the current tab page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When 1, only the current buffer is converted. Example: > let g:html_diff_one_file = 1 < g:html_whole_filler Default: 0. When 0, if \|g:html_diff_one_file\| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number of inserted lines. When 1, always display all inserted lines as if \|g:html_diff_one_file\| were not set. > :let g:html_whole_filler = 1 < TOhtml-performance g:html_no_progress Default: 0. When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the 2html.vim conversion process. When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big files it can take a long time! Example: > let g:html_no_progress = 1 < You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: > vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c < Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML conversion. See \|-E\| and \|-s-ex\| for details. It is probably best to create a script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of specifying each command separately. g:html_number_lines Default: current 'number' setting. When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering. When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same highlighting as the line number column in Vim (\|hl-LineNr\|). Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: > :let g:html_number_lines = 1 Force to omit the line numbers: > :let g:html_number_lines = 0 Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: > :unlet g:html_number_lines < g:html_line_ids Default: 1 if \|g:html_number_lines\| is set, 0 otherwise. When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span> inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds (\|g:html_dynamic_folds\|) containing the specified line before jumping. The javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L. For example: > page.html#L123 jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file page.html#123 does the same diff.html#W1L42 jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff diff.html#42 does the same < g:html_use_css Default: 1. When 1, generate valid HTML 4.01 markup with CSS1 styling, supported in all modern browsers and most old browsers. When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients, forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable. Example: > :let g:html_use_css = 0 < g:html_ignore_conceal Default: 0. When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character from \|:syn-cchar\| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current value of 'conceallevel'. When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is \|conceal\|ed. Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): > :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1 :setl conceallevel=0 < g:html_ignore_folding Default: 0. When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in Vim (\|fold-foldtext\|). See \|g:html_dynamic_folds\| if you also want to allow the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside. When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the text is in a fold has no impact at all. \|g:html_dynamic_folds\| has no effect. Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): > zR :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1 < g:html_dynamic_folds Default: 0. When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML. When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like in Vim. Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling, regardless of what \|g:html_use_css\| is set to. This variable is ignored when \|g:html_ignore_folding\| is set. > :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1 < g:html_no_foldcolumn Default: 0. When 0, if \|g:html_dynamic_folds\| is 1, generate a column of text similar to Vim's foldcolumn (\|fold-foldcolumn\|) the user can click on to toggle folds open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current 'foldcolumn' setting. When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over folded text will open the fold as if \|g:html_hover_unfold\| were set. > :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1 < TOhtml-uncopyable-text g:html_prevent_copy Default: empty string. This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied, when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be affected in this way as follows: f: fold column n: line numbers (also within fold text) t: fold text d: diff filler Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: > :let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn" < This feature is currently implemented by inserting read-only <input> elements into the markup to contain the uncopyable areas. This does not work well in all cases. When pasting to some applications which understand HTML, the <input> elements also get pasted. But plain-text paste destinations should always work. g:html_no_invalid Default: 0. When 0, if \|g:html_prevent_copy\| is non-empty, an invalid attribute is intentionally inserted into the <input> element for the uncopyable areas. This increases the number of applications you can paste to without also pasting the <input> elements. Specifically, Microsoft Word will not paste the <input> elements if they contain this invalid attribute. When 1, no invalid markup is ever intentionally inserted, and the generated page should validate. However, be careful pasting into Microsoft Word when \|g:html_prevent_copy\| is non-empty; it can be hard to get rid of the <input> elements which get pasted. g:html_hover_unfold Default: 0. When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with \|g:html_dynamic_folds\| set, is to click on the generated fold column. When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with disabled javascript to view the folded text. Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but they will not be openable without a foldcolumn. > :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1 < g:html_id_expr Default: "" Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document, so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: > :let g:html_id_expr = '"_".bufnr("%")' < To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: > :let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"' < Note, when converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the windows. TOhtml-wrap-text g:html_pre_wrap Default: current 'wrap' setting. When 0, if \|g:html_no_pre\| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does not wrap at the edge of the browser window. When 1, if \|g:html_use_css\| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser window. Explicitly enable text wrapping: > :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1 Explicitly disable wrapping: > :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0 Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: > :unlet g:html_pre_wrap < g:html_no_pre Default: 0. When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre> tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab characters can be included literally (see \|g:html_expand_tabs\|). When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of   character references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow text in the generated HTML is wrap (see \|g:html_pre_wrap\|) which also works in old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and the rendered page generated by 2html.vim. > :let g:html_no_pre = 1 < g:html_expand_tabs Default: 1 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, and no fold column or line numbers occur in the generated HTML; 0 otherwise. When 0, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate number of space characters, or   references if \|g:html_no_pre\| is 1. When 1, if \|g:html_no_pre\| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and indentation in the HTML, unless set by default. Force \|2html.vim\| to keep <Tab> characters: > :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0 < Force tabs to be expanded: > :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1 < TOhtml-encoding-detect TOhtml-encoding It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with \|g:html_use_encoding\| for any content which will be placed on a web server. If you do not specify an encoding, \|2html.vim\| uses the preferred IANA name for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not. 'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be set to match the chosen document encoding. Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in \|encoding-names\|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names. Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C: http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark g:html_use_encoding Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above. To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a webserver: > :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8" You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): > :let g:html_use_encoding = "" To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the \|g:html_use_encoding\| variable: > :unlet g:html_use_encoding < g:html_encoding_override Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings mentioned by name at \|encoding-names\|. This option allows \|2html.vim\| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you specify an encoding with \|g:html_use_encoding\| which is not in the default list of conversions. This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs. Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": > :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'} < g:html_charset_override Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings mentioned by name at \|encoding-names\| and which have wide browser support. This option allows \|2html.vim\| to detect the HTML charset for any 'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example, TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16 and UTF-32 instead, use: > :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'} Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known compatibility problems with some major browsers. g:html_font Default: "monospace" You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS). Examples: > " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace; :let g:html_font = "Consolas" " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace; :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"] < convert-to-XML convert-to-XHTML g:html_use_xhtml Default: 0. When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible). When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML). > :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1 < ABEL abel.vim ft-abel-syntax ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign any value to the respective variable. Example: > :let abel_obsolete_ok=1 To disable them use ":unlet". Example: > :unlet abel_obsolete_ok Variable Highlight ~ abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader ADA See \|ft-ada-syntax\| ANT ant.vim ft-ant-syntax The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: > :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim') will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code > <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[ # everything inside is highlighted as perl ]]></script> See \|mysyntaxfile-add\| for installing script languages permanently. APACHE apache.vim ft-apache-syntax The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server version 2.2.3. asm.vim asmh8300.vim nasm.vim masm.vim asm68k ASSEMBLY ft-asm-syntax ft-asmh8300-syntax ft-nasm-syntax ft-masm-syntax ft-asm68k-syntax fasm.vim Files matching ".i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your startup vimrc: > :let filetype_i = "asm" Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use. There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax files are included: asm GNU assembly (the default) asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly ia64 Intel Itanium 64 fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net) masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86) nasm Netwide assembly tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and MMX) pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84) The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: > asmsyntax=nasm Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be immediately before or after this text. Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is equivalent to setting ft=foo in a \|modeline\|, and that in case of a conflict between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax). The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the b:asmsyntax variable: > :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm" If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly language: > :let asmsyntax = "nasm" As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used. Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~ To enable a feature: > :let {variable}=1\|set syntax=nasm To disable a feature: > :unlet {variable} \|set syntax=nasm Variable Highlight ~ nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error (parser dependent; not recommended) nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo ASPPERL and ASPVBS ft-aspperl-syntax* ft-aspvbs-syntax .asp and .asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are using. For Perl script use: > :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl" :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl" For Visual Basic use: > :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs" :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs" BAAN baan.vim baan-syntax The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV upto SSA ERP LN for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants are supported. Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify in ones \|.vimrc\|: > let baan_code_stds=1 baan-folding Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables mentioned below (Set those in your \|.vimrc\|). The more complex folding on source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive. To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: > let baan_fold=1 Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). > let baan_fold_block=1 Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO, SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). > let baan_fold_sql=1 Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to \|:set\| the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in \|.vimrc\| or use \|:setlocal\| in .../after/syntax/baan.vim (see \|after-directory\|). Eg: > set foldminlines=5 set foldnestmax=6 BASIC basic.vim vb.vim ft-basic-syntax ft-vb-syntax Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic", otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual Basic. C c.vim ft-c-syntax A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value to the respective variable. Example: > :let c_comment_strings = 1 To disable them use ":unlet". Example: > :unlet c_comment_strings Variable Highlight ~ c_gnu GNU gcc specific items c_comment_strings strings and numbers inside a comment c_space_errors trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab> c_no_trail_space_error ... but no trailing spaces c_no_tab_space_error ... but no spaces before a <Tab> c_no_bracket_error don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors c_no_curly_error don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors; except { and } in first column Default is to highlight them, otherwise you can't spot a missing ")". c_curly_error highlight a missing }; this forces syncing from the start of the file, can be slow c_no_ansi don't do standard ANSI types and constants c_ansi_typedefs ... but do standard ANSI types c_ansi_constants ... but do standard ANSI constants c_no_utf don't highlight \u and \U in strings c_syntax_for_h for .h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc syntax instead of objcpp c_no_if0* don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments c_no_cformat don't highlight %-formats in strings c_no_c99 don't highlight C99 standard items c_no_c11 don't highlight C11 standard items c_no_bsd don't highlight BSD specific types When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* / comments and { } blocks will become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: > :let c_no_comment_fold = 1 "#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: > :let c_no_if0_fold = 1 If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable to a larger number: > :let c_minlines = 100 This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow. When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly. To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster. Example: > :au Syntax c call MyCadd() :function MyCadd() : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem : hi link cMyItem Title :endfun ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes "NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant highlighting: > :hi link cConstant NONE If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket. If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. > syn sync fromstart set foldmethod=syntax CH ch.vim* ft-ch-syntax C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon the C syntax file. See \|c.vim\| for all the settings that are available for C. By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for .h files, instead of C or C++: > :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1 CHILL chill.vim* ft-chill-syntax Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See \|c.vim\| for all the settings that are available. Additionally there is: chill_space_errors like c_space_errors chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings chill_minlines like c_minlines CHANGELOG changelog.vim ft-changelog-syntax ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line. If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: > let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0 This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use "b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax file). You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: > :hi link ChangelogError Error Or to avoid the highlighting: > :hi link ChangelogError NONE This works immediately. CLOJURE ft-clojure-syntax The default syntax groups can be augmented through the g:clojure_syntax_keywords and b:clojure_syntax_keywords variables. The value should be a \|Dictionary\| of syntax group names to a \|List\| of custom identifiers: > let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = { \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"], \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"] \ } < Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names. If the \|buffer-variable\| b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords is set, only language constants and special forms are matched. Setting g:clojure_fold enables folding Clojure code via the syntax engine. Any list, vector, or map that extends over more than one line can be folded using the standard Vim \|fold-commands\|. Please note that this option does not work with scripts that redefine the bracket syntax regions, such as rainbow-parentheses plugins. This option is off by default. > " Default let g:clojure_fold = 0 < COBOL cobol.vim ft-cobol-syntax COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting, add this line to your .vimrc: > :let cobol_legacy_code = 1 To disable it again, use this: > :unlet cobol_legacy_code COLD FUSION coldfusion.vim ft-coldfusion-syntax The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > :let html_wrong_comments = 1 The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file. CPP cpp.vim ft-cpp-syntax Most of things are same as \|ft-c-syntax\|. Variable Highlight ~ cpp_no_cpp11 don't highlight C++11 standard items cpp_no_cpp14 don't highlight C++14 standard items CSH csh.vim ft-csh-syntax This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually used. Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the "filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: g:filetype_csh > :let g:filetype_csh = "csh" For using tcsh: > :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh" Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc, tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the "filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the variable. CYNLIB cynlib.vim ft-cynlib-syntax Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this line to your .vimrc file: > :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1 Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) > :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1 To disable these again, use this: > :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp < CWEB cweb.vim ft-cweb-syntax Files matching ".w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your startup vimrc: > :let filetype_w = "cweb" DESKTOP desktop.vim* ft-desktop-syntax Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files according to freedesktop.org standard: http://standards.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/ But actually almost none implements this standard fully. Thus it will highlight all Unix ini files. But you can force strict highlighting according to standard by placing this in your vimrc file: > :let enforce_freedesktop_standard = 1 DIFF diff.vim The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers. This can be slow if there are very long lines in the file. To disable translations: > :let diff_translations = 0 Also see \|diff-slow\|. DIRCOLORS dircolors.vim ft-dircolors-syntax The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following line to your startup file: > let dircolors_is_slackware = 1 DOCBOOK docbk.vim ft-docbk-syntax docbook DOCBOOK XML docbkxml.vim ft-docbkxml-syntax DOCBOOK SGML docbksgml.vim ft-docbksgml-syntax There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type defaults to XML. You can set the type manually: > :let docbk_type = "sgml" or: > :let docbk_type = "xml" You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated. Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": > :set filetype=docbksgml or: > :set filetype=docbkxml You can specify the DocBook version: > :let docbk_ver = 3 When not set 4 is used. DOSBATCH dosbatch.vim ft-dosbatch-syntax There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2. Select the version you want with the following line: > :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1 If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support Windows 2000. A second option covers whether .btm files should be detected as type "dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: > :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1 If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected. DOXYGEN doxygen.vim* doxygen-syntax Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format (similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp, idl and php files, and should also work with java. There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file. Example: > :set syntax=c.doxygen or > // vim:syntax=c.doxygen It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by adding the following to your .vimrc. > :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1 There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and are to do with non-standard highlighting options. Variable Default Effect ~ g:doxygen_enhanced_color g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for doxygen comments. doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic and html_my_rendering underline. doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief colour highlighting. doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending punctuation of brief There are also some hilight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in configuration. Highlight Effect ~ doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the \endlink from a \link section. DTD dtd.vim ft-dtd-syntax The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > :let dtd_ignore_case=1 The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: > :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1 before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file. Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the 'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'. Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant' highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: > :let dtd_no_param_entities=1 The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's. EIFFEL eiffel.vim ft-eiffel-syntax While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > :let eiffel_ignore_case=1 Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments. Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: > :let eiffel_strict=1 :let eiffel_pedantic=1 Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and "NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names. Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords). If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void", "Result", and "Precursor", you can use > :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1 instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off. Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: > :let eiffel_ise=1 Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add > :let eiffel_hex_constants=1 to your startup file. EUPHORIA euphoria3.vim euphoria4.vim ft-euphoria-syntax Two syntax highlighting files exists for Euphoria. One for Euphoria version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later. Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4 (http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support. The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type: .e, .eu, .ew, .ex, .exu, .exw .E, .EU, .EW, .EX, .EXU, .EXW To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for auto-detecting the .e and .E file extensions as Euphoria file type, add the following line to your startup file: > :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria3" or :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria4" ERLANG erlang.vim ft-erlang-syntax Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson. Files with the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws. The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this, put the following line in your vimrc: > :let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0 To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: > :let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1 FLEXWIKI flexwiki.vim ft-flexwiki-syntax FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com NOTE: this site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that development stopped in 2009. Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length), 'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak' (to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen), and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default. If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: > :let flexwiki_maps = 1 FORM form.vim ft-form-syntax The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String, following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991. If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to redefine the following syntax groups: - formConditional - formNumber - formStatement - formHeaderStatement - formComment - formPreProc - formDirective - formType - formString Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and directives per default in the same syntax group. A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file > :let form_enhanced_color=1 The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction. FORTRAN fortran.vim ft-fortran-syntax Default highlighting and dialect ~ Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77). Fortran source code form ~ Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set. When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source form. If you always use free source form, then > :let fortran_free_source=1 in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source form, then > :let fortran_fixed_source=1 in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin file. For more information on ftplugin files, see \|ftplugin\|. Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file. When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five columns of the first 500 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens, just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file. Tabs in fortran files ~ Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries. Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as > :let fortran_have_tabs=1 placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins. Syntax folding of fortran files ~ If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable fortran_fold with a command such as > :let fortran_fold=1 to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as > :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1 then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select case constructs. If you also set the variable fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as > :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1 then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files. If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program unit. More precise fortran syntax ~ If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as > :let fortran_more_precise=1 then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular, statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall construct. Non-default fortran dialects ~ The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo items. If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and that free source form will be assumed. The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are ignored. If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on ftplugin files, see \|ftplugin\|. For example, if all your fortran files with an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should contain the code > let s:extfname = expand("%:e") if s:extfname ==? "f90" let b:fortran_dialect="F" else unlet! b:fortran_dialect endif Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file. Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis, by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a Fortran comment of the form > ! fortran_dialect=F For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F" instead. The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo items. Limitations ~ Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly because Fortran90 has no reserved words. For further information related to fortran, see \|ft-fortran-indent\| and \|ft-fortran-plugin\|. FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES fvwm.vim ft-fvwm-syntax In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match the patterns fvwmrc or fvwm2rc , you must put additional patterns appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm. For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/ as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: > :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 \| \ set filetype=fvwm If you'd like Vim to highlight all valid color names, tell it where to find the color database (rgb.txt) on your system. Do this by setting "rgb_file" to its location. Assuming your color database is located in /usr/X11/lib/X11/, you should add the line > :let rgb_file = "/usr/X11/lib/X11/rgb.txt" to your .vimrc file. GSP gsp.vim ft-gsp-syntax The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by \|html.vim\|, and the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks) is defined by \|java.vim\|. The following HTML groups defined in \|html.vim\| are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code: htmlString htmlValue htmlEndTag htmlTag htmlTagN Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight correctly, just copy the line you want from \|html.vim\| and add gspJava to the contains clause. The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError group to make them easier to see. GROFF groff.vim ft-groff-syntax The groff syntax file is a wrapper for \|nroff.vim\|, see the notes under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the filetype from a \|modeline\| or in a personal filetype definitions file (see \|filetype.txt\|). HASKELL haskell.vim lhaskell.vim ft-haskell-syntax The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives. If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: > :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1 To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers, add: > :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1 To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: > :let hs_highlight_types = 1 And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: > :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1 If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in your .vimrc: > :let hs_highlight_debug = 1 The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: > :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1 The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting in your .vimrc > :let lhs_markup = none for no highlighting at all, or > :let lhs_markup = tex to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup. For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of this variable, so e.g. > :let b:lhs_markup = tex will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or loading a file. HTML html.vim ft-html-syntax The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows. The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag. This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are defined for you) Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which makes it easy to spot errors Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute names are colored differently than unknown ones. Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>, while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in <A href="somefile.html">). If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the following syntax groups: - htmlBold - htmlBoldUnderline - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic - htmlUnderline - htmlUnderlineItalic - htmlItalic - htmlTitle for titles - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files are read during initialization) > :let html_my_rendering=1 If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your vimrc file: > :let html_no_rendering=1 HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors. However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and ends with -->) you can define > :let html_wrong_comments=1 JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as 'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently supported, no other scripting language has been added yet. Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too. There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language (the example comes from the asp.vim file): runtime! syntax/html.vim syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc. HTML/OS (by Aestiva) htmlos.vim ft-htmlos-syntax The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows: Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: > :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose. Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: > :set syntax=htmlos Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively. IA64 ia64.vim intel-itanium ft-ia64-syntax Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See \|asm.vim\| for how to recognize this filetype. To have .inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: > :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64" INFORM inform.vim* ft-inform-syntax Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: > :let inform_highlight_simple=1 By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted, and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you need to add this to your startup sequence: > :let inform_highlight_glulx=1 This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the set of highlighted system functions. The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your startup sequence: > :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1 By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your startup sequence: > :let inform_highlight_old=1 IDL idl.vim idl-syntax IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls. IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat repetitive but seems to work. There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions. The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions. Variable Effect ~ idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific extensions idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but quite helpful) idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors JAVA java.vim ft-java-syntax The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options: In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old way, put the following line into your vim startup file: > :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1 All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To highlight them use: > :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1 You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html. If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io use the following: > :let java_highlight_java_io=1 Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported. Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight functions: If you write function declarations that are always indented by either a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set > :let java_highlight_functions="indent" However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use > :let java_highlight_functions="style" If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the original one and then adds the code to highlight functions. In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in your startup file: > :let java_highlight_debug=1 The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special' characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define new highlightings for the following groups.: Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I have opted to chose another background for those statements. Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code similarly to HTML files (see \|html.vim\|). You can even add Javascript and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however: 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change the color change the group CommentTitle). 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'. 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special' 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function. To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: > :let java_ignore_javadoc=1 If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded CSS. The options to use are > :let java_javascript=1 :let java_css=1 :let java_vb=1 In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with > :hi link javaParen Comment or > :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable to a larger number: > :let java_minlines = 50 This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow. LACE lace.vim ft-lace-syntax Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: > :let lace_case_insensitive=1 LEX lex.vim ft-lex-syntax Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for > :syn sync minlines=300 may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files). LIFELINES lifelines.vim ft-lifelines-syntax To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: > :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1 < LISP lisp.vim ft-lisp-syntax The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: > g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted as if the contents of the string were lisp. Useful for AutoLisp. g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels of parenthesization will receive different highlighting. < The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the usual colorscheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see \|'bg'\|). LITE lite.vim ft-lite-syntax There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting. If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > :let lite_sql_query = 1 For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > :let lite_minlines = 200 LPC lpc.vim ft-lpc-syntax LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensj\| C. The file name of LPC is usually .c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you should set a variable in your .vimrc file: > :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1 If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a modeline. For a LPC file: // vim:set ft=lpc: For a C file that is recognized as LPC: // vim:set ft=c: If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file. There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22 and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when you are using the latest version of MudOS: > :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1 For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: > :let lpc_compat_32 = 1 For LPC4 series of LPC: > :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1 For uLPC series of LPC: uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax instead, and the name of your source file should be .pike LUA lua.vim ft-lua-syntax The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua 5.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this: :let lua_version = 5 :let lua_subversion = 1 MAIL mail.vim ft-mail.vim Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures, quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions, signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by whitespaces and end with a newline. Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '\|', '>' or a word followed by '>' as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space). By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: > :let mail_minlines = 30 MAKE make.vim ft-make-syntax In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this feature off by using: > :let make_no_commands = 1 MAPLE maple.vim ft-maple-syntax Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user. The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: > :let mvpkg_all= 1 to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to 1, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim). Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors > mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries MATHEMATICA mma.vim ft-mma-syntax ft-mathematica-syntax Empty .m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you have the following in your .vimrc: > let filetype_m = "mma" MOO moo.vim* ft-moo-syntax If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style comments: > :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1 To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: > :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1 To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%\|', and matching '%(' and '%)' inside strings: > :let moo_no_regexp = 1 Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: > :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1 To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): > :let moo_builtin_properties = 1 Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group. To enable this option: > :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1 An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: > :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained MSQL msql.vim ft-msql-syntax There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting. If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > :let msql_sql_query = 1 For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > :let msql_minlines = 200 N1QL n1ql.vim ft-n1ql-syntax N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in Couchbase Server databases. Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments, and special values. Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL. NCF ncf.vim ft-ncf-syntax There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting. If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as errors, use this: > :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1 If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset. NROFF nroff.vim ft-nroff-syntax The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you can use them. For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting features for groff, add the following option to your start-up files: > :let b:nroff_is_groff = 1 Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly: \[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim environments. In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation. 1. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines. 2. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period, exclamation mark, etc. 3. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a carriage return. The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above. Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and, furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and vertical space input will be output as is. Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you need to maintain regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: > :let nroff_space_errors = 1 Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and "nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: > hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold \ gui=reverse,bold If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc file: > let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1 As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package. Finally, there is a \|groff.vim\| syntax file that can be used for enabling groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default. OCAML ocaml.vim ft-ocaml-syntax The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml, .mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable > :let ocaml_revised = 1 you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable > :let ocaml_noend_error = 1 prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore. PAPP papp.vim ft-papp-syntax The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extend, .pxml and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If you set the variable: > :let papp_include_html=1 in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to edit sensibly. ;) The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at http://papp.plan9.de. PASCAL pascal.vim ft-pascal-syntax Files matching ".p" could be Progress or Pascal. If the automatic detection doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your startup vimrc: > :let filetype_p = "pascal" The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler. Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the following line to your startup file: > :let pascal_traditional=1 To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments, keywords, etc): > :let pascal_delphi=1 The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +, , .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol operators, add the following line to your startup file: > :let pascal_symbol_operator=1 Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: > :let pascal_no_functions=1 Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to match Turbo Pascal. > :let pascal_gpc=1 or > :let pascal_fpc=1 To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the pascal_one_line_string variable. > :let pascal_one_line_string=1 If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs will be highlighted as Error. > :let pascal_no_tabs=1 PERL perl.vim ft-perl-syntax There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting. Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default. If you don't wish to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: > :let perl_include_pod = 0 To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. > To handle package references in variable and function names not differently from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): > :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1 (In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables" enabled it.) If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: > :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1 (In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.) The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line. "hello world!"; qq\|hello world\|; ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement) S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement) (^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all) The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly. If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure out the line that causes the mistake. One triggers on "^\ssub\s" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. > :let perl_no_sync_on_sub :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for its attempts in syntax highlighting. > :let perl_sync_dist = 100 If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: > :let perl_fold = 1 If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: > :let perl_fold_blocks = 1 Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. If you do not want this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': > :let perl_nofold_subs = 1 Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': > :let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1 Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. To disable this behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': > :let perl_nofold_packages = 1 PHP3 and PHP4 php.vim php3.vim ft-php-syntax ft-php3-syntax [note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4 it has been renamed to "php"] There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting. If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: > let php_sql_query = 1 For highlighting the Baselib methods: > let php_baselib = 1 Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: > let php_htmlInStrings = 1 Using the old colorstyle: > let php_oldStyle = 1 Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: > let php_asp_tags = 1 Disable short tags: > let php_noShortTags = 1 For highlighting parent error ] or ): > let php_parent_error_close = 1 For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing one: > let php_parent_error_open = 1 Enable folding for classes and functions: > let php_folding = 1 Selecting syncing method: > let php_sync_method = x x = -1 to sync by search (default), x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards, x = 0 to sync from start. PLAINTEX plaintex.vim ft-plaintex-syntax TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain" variant of TeX. If you never want your .tex files recognized as plain TeX, see \|ft-tex-plugin\|. This syntax file has the option > let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1 if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}". PPWIZARD ppwiz.vim* ft-ppwiz-syntax PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files This syntax file has the options: - ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's definitions. Possible values are ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables) ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line continuation symbols The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1. - ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text. PHTML phtml.vim ft-phtml-syntax There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting. If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > :let phtml_sql_query = 1 For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > :let phtml_minlines = 200 POSTSCRIPT postscr.vim ft-postscr-syntax There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript. First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2. Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: > :let postscr_level=2 If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is the most prevalent version currently. Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript! If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as follows: > :let postscr_display=1 If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable postscr_ghostscript as follows: > :let postscr_ghostscript=1 PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: > :let postscr_fonts=1 :let postscr_encodings=1 There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators, if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable postscr_andornot_binary as follows: > :let postscr_andornot_binary=1 < ptcap.vim ft-printcap-syntax PRINTCAP + TERMCAP ft-ptcap-syntax ft-termcap-syntax This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases. In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match the patterns printcap, or termcap, you must put additional patterns appropriate to your system in your \|myfiletypefile\| file. For these patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or "term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap. For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap files, add the following: > :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" \| \ set filetype=ptcap If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines" internal variable to a larger number: > :let ptcap_minlines = 50 (The default is 20 lines.) PROGRESS progress.vim ft-progress-syntax Files matching ".w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your startup vimrc: > :let filetype_w = "progress" The same happens for ".i", which could be assembly, and ".p", which could be Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: > :let filetype_i = "progress" :let filetype_p = "progress" PYTHON python.vim* ft-python-syntax There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting. For highlighted numbers: > :let python_no_number_highlight = 1 For highlighted builtin functions: > :let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1 For highlighted standard exceptions: > :let python_no_exception_highlight = 1 For highlighted doctests and code inside: > :let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1 or > :let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1 (first option implies second one). For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: > :let python_space_error_highlight = 1 If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the preceding last option and unsetting all other ones): > :let python_highlight_all = 1 Note: only existence of these options matter, not their value. You can replace 1 above with anything. QUAKE quake.vim ft-quake-syntax The Quake syntax definition should work for most any FPS (First Person Shooter) based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary a bit between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the syntax definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow users to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables can be set for the following effects: set to highlight commands only available in Quake: > :let quake_is_quake1 = 1 set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: > :let quake_is_quake2 = 1 set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: > :let quake_is_quake3 = 1 Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more commands than are actually available to you by the game. READLINE readline.vim ft-readline-syntax The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these items as well you can add the following to your \|vimrc\| or just type it in the command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: > let readline_has_bash = 1 This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and later, and part earlier) adds. RESTRUCTURED TEXT rst.vim ft-rst-syntax You may set what syntax definitions should be used for code blocks via > let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...] < REXX rexx.vim ft-rexx-syntax If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable to a larger number: > :let rexx_minlines = 50 This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow. Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to your .vimrc: g:filetype_r > :let g:filetype_r = "r" RUBY ruby.vim ft-ruby-syntax Ruby: Operator highlighting \|ruby_operators\| Ruby: Whitespace errors \|ruby_space_errors\| Ruby: Folding \|ruby_fold\| \|ruby_foldable_groups\| Ruby: Reducing expensive operations \|ruby_no_expensive\| \|ruby_minlines\| Ruby: Spellchecking strings \|ruby_spellcheck_strings\| ruby_operators Ruby: Operator highlighting ~ Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": > :let ruby_operators = 1 < ruby_space_errors Ruby: Whitespace errors ~ Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": > :let ruby_space_errors = 1 < This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and "ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after spaces respectively. ruby_fold ruby_foldable_groups Ruby: Folding ~ Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": > :let ruby_fold = 1 < This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby filetypes. Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do", "%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels. You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: > :let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %' < The value is a space-separated list of keywords: keyword meaning ~ -------- ------------------------------------- ~ ALL Most block syntax (default) NONE Nothing if "if" or "unless" block def "def" block class "class" block module "module" block do "do" block begin "begin" block case "case" block for "for", "while", "until" loops { Curly bracket block or hash literal [ Array literal % Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING! / Regexp string String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `) : Symbol # Multiline comment << Here documents __END__ Source code after "__END__" directive ruby_no_expensive Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~ By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support) you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: > :let ruby_no_expensive = 1 < In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords. ruby_minlines If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: > :let ruby_minlines = 100 < Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your largest class or module. ruby_spellcheck_strings Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~ Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define "ruby_spellcheck_strings": > :let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1 < SCHEME scheme.vim ft-scheme-syntax By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented. scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler. Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them. SDL sdl.vim ft-sdl-syntax The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many of them it's almost impossibly to cope. The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: > :let sdl_2000=1 This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: > :let SDL_no_96=1 The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very satisfied with it for my own projects. SED sed.vim ft-sed-syntax To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting > :let highlight_sedtabs = 1 in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that, you can easily count the number of tabs in a string. Bugs: The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned, transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong. (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for each plausible pattern delimiter). SGML sgml.vim ft-sgml-syntax The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows. The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag. This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are defined for you) Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors. Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute names are colored differently than unknown ones. Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal> <replaceable> <ulink> and <link>. If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the following syntax groups: - sgmlBold - sgmlBoldItalic - sgmlUnderline - sgmlItalic - sgmlLink for links To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files are read during initialization) > let sgml_my_rendering=1 You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your vimrc file: > let sgml_no_rendering=1 (Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>) ft-posix-synax ft-dash-syntax SH sh.vim ft-sh-syntax ft-bash-syntax ft-ksh-syntax This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells. Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that various filenames are of specific types: > ksh : .kshrc* .ksh bash: .bashrc bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* .bash < If none of these cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined (ex. looking for /bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, then that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to be shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems sh is symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix). One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following variables in your <.vimrc>: ksh: > let g:is_kornshell = 1 < posix: (using this is the nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) > let g:is_posix = 1 < bash: > let g:is_bash = 1 < sh: (default) Bourne shell > let g:is_sh = 1 < (dash users should use posix) If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>. The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: > let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding) let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding) let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding) let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding) > then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become syntax-foldable (see \|:syn-fold\|). You also may add these together to get multiple types of folding: > let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding) If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable to a larger number. Example: > let sh_minlines = 500 This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow. If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: > let sh_maxlines = 100 < The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear. syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like extra ']'s, 'done's, 'fi's, etc. If you find the error handling problematic for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting the following line in your .vimrc: > let g:sh_no_error= 1 < sh-embed* sh-awk Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~ You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: > " AWK Embedding: " ============== " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope. if exists("b:current_syntax") unlet b:current_syntax endif syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded hi def link AWKCommand Type < This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: > awk '...awk code here...' be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be extended to other languages. SPEEDUP spup.vim ft-spup-syntax (AspenTech plant simulator) The Speedup syntax file has some options: - strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section). - highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include them in the syntax file. - oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the highlighting of # style comments. oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even number of #s. oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as error. This is the default setting. oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains more than one #. Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of the syntax file. SQL sql.vim ft-sql-syntax sqlinformix.vim ft-sqlinformix-syntax sqlanywhere.vim ft-sqlanywhere-syntax While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of SQL. Vim assumes ".sql" files are Oracle SQL by default. Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a buffer by buffer basis. For more detailed instructions see \|ft_sql.txt\|. TCSH tcsh.vim* ft-tcsh-syntax This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See \|csh.vim\| for how the filetype is detected. Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add this line to your .vimrc: > :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0 If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable to a larger number: > :let tcsh_minlines = 1000 This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow. TEX tex.vim ft-tex-syntax latex-syntax Tex Contents~ Tex: Want Syntax Folding? \|tex-folding\| Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted \|g:tex_nospell\| Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? \|tex-nospell\| Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones? \|tex-verb\| Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones \|tex-runon\| Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? \|tex-slow\| Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? \|tex-morecommands\| Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? \|tex-error\| Tex: Need a new Math Group? \|tex-math\| Tex: Starting a New Style? \|tex-style\| Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode \|tex-conceal\| Tex: Selective Conceal Mode \|g:tex_conceal\| Tex: Controlling iskeyword \|g:tex_isk\| Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control \|tex-supersub\| tex-folding g:tex_fold_enabled Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~ As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters, sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put > let g:tex_fold_enabled=1 in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: > % vim: fdm=syntax If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into > https://vimhelp.appspot.com/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7 < g:tex_nospell Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~ If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put > let g:tex_nospell=1 into your .vimrc. If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside comments only, see \|g:tex_comment_nospell\|. tex-nospell g:tex_comment_nospell Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~ Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: > let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1 If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document, see \|g:tex_nospell\|. tex-verb g:tex_verbspell Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~ Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: > let g:tex_verbspell= 1 < tex-runon tex-stopzone Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~ The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a special "TeX comment" has been provided > %stopzone which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a texMathZone. tex-slow tex-sync Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~ If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for > :syn sync maxlines=200 :syn sync minlines=50 (especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group, if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?). Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see \|tex-folding\| for a way around this. g:tex_fast Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set > :let g:tex_fast= "" in your .vimrc. Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated synchronization. The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking. You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: > b : allow bold and italic syntax c : allow texComment syntax m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...]) M : allow texMath syntax p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref) s : allow superscript/subscript regions S : allow texStyle syntax v : allow verbatim syntax V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax < As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting. (also see: \|g:tex_conceal\| and \|tex-supersub\|) tex-morecommands tex-package Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~ LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the techniques in \|mysyntaxfile-add\| to extend or modify the highlighting provided by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write, which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to http://vim.sf.net/. tex-error g:tex_no_error Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~ The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus, although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you, you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: > let g:tex_no_error=1 and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed. tex-math Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~ If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following code shows you an example as to how you might do so: > call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform) You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix (currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself). As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: > call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1) You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group, and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim. The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group has a starred form (ie. eqnarray). tex-style* b:tex_stylish Tex: Starting a New Style? ~ One may use "\makeatletter" in .tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in commands available. However, since the .tex file doesn't have one of the following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag such use of @ as an error. To solve this: > :let b:tex_stylish = 1 :set ft=tex Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim> always accept such use of @. tex-cchar tex-cole tex-conceal Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~ If you have \|'conceallevel'\| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs, including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports. In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts. One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see \|CTRL-W_v\|); one with \|'conceallevel'\| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using \|'scrollbind'\|. g:tex_conceal Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~ You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your <.vimrc>. By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment for the following sets of characters: > a = accents/ligatures b = bold and italic d = delimiters m = math symbols g = Greek s = superscripts/subscripts < By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character substitution will not be made. g:tex_isk g:tex_stylish Tex: Controlling iskeyword~ Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex keywords don't support the underscore - except when in .sty files. The syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic: If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_" will be allowed as part of keywords (regardless of g:tex_isk) * Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx, then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_" will be allowed as part of keywords (regardless of g:tex_isk) * If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword' * Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255 tex-supersub g:tex_superscripts g:tex_subscripts Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~ See \|tex-conceal\| for how to enable concealed character replacement. See \|g:tex_conceal\| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic, math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts. One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one wants syntax-based concealment for (see \|:syn-cchar\|). Since not all fonts support all characters, one may override the concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: > let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]" let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]" < For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript characters for "hklmnpst", so I put > let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]" < in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable utf-8 glyphs appear. TF tf.vim ft-tf-syntax There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting. For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > :let tf_minlines = your choice < VIM vim.vim ft-vim-syntax g:vimsyn_minlines g:vimsyn_maxlines There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to improve screen updating rates (see \|:syn-sync\| for more on this). > g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines < (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of these two options) g:vimsyn_embed The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of embedded script highlighting they wish to have. > g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't support any embedded scripts g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl < By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim itself supports. Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme and embedded perl. g:vimsyn_folding Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: > g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua script g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script < g:vimsyn_noerror Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script is a difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error highlighting is to put the following line in your \|vimrc\|: > let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1 < XF86CONFIG xf86conf.vim ft-xf86conf-syntax The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect. You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in your .vimrc. Example: > :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3 When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable. Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use "SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name highlighted. XML xml.vim ft-xml-syntax Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by setting a global variable: > :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1 < xml-folding The xml syntax file provides syntax \|folding\| (see \|:syn-fold\|) between start and end tags. This can be turned on by > :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1 :set foldmethod=syntax Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly, especially for large files. X Pixmaps (XPM) xpm.vim ft-xpm-syntax xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings, you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm". To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it somewhere else with "P". Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: > :function! GetPixel() : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1] : echo c : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c :endfunction :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR> :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen. It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it. It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: > :set guifont=--clean-medium-r---8-----80- YAML yaml.vim ft-yaml-syntax g:yaml_schema b:yaml_schema A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point, integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are Schema Description ~ failsafe No additional highlighting. json Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null. core Supports more number, boolean and null styles. pyyaml In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps, but there are some differences in what is recognized as numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core schema. Default schema is `core`. Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only difference defined in the syntax file. ZSH zsh.vim ft-zsh-syntax The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: > :let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1 ============================================================================== 5. Defining a syntax :syn-define E410 Vim understands three types of syntax items: 1. Keyword It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword' option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match). The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is. 2. Match This is a match with a single regexp pattern. 3. Region This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern. Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item to define a "/* .. /" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment, and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a "Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group. This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting for a lot of groups. Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used for the syntax group with the same name. In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a keyword with ignoring case. PRIORITY :syn-priority* When several syntax items may match, these rules are used: 1. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item defined last has priority. 2. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items. 3. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that start in later positions. DEFINING CASE :syn-case E390 :sy[ntax] case [match \| ignore] This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected. :sy[ntax] case Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore" (translated). SPELL CHECKING :syn-spell :sy[ntax] spell [toplevel \| notoplevel \| default] This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not in a syntax item: toplevel: Text is spell checked. notoplevel: Text is not spell checked. default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking. For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters \|spell-syntax\|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel". To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set. :sy[ntax] spell Show either "syntax spell toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or "syntax spell default" (translated). SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING :syn-iskeyword :sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear \| {option}] This defines the keyword characters. It's like the 'iskeyword' option for but only applies to syntax highlighting. clear: Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used. {option} Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value. Example: > :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_ < This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented characters and also includes the "_" and the "$". If no argument is given, the current value will be output. Setting this option influences what \|/\k\| matches in syntax patterns and also determines where \|:syn-keyword\| will be checked for a new match. It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change the 'iskeyword' option. DEFINING KEYWORDS :syn-keyword :sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}] This defines a number of keywords. {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment". [{options}] See \|:syn-arguments\| below. {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group. Example: > :syntax keyword Type int long char < The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword. These examples do exactly the same: > :syntax keyword Type contained int long char :syntax keyword Type int long contained char :syntax keyword Type int long char contained < E789 E890 When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the variations at once: > :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext] < Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character isn't, the keyword will never be recognized. Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in 'iskeyword'. See \|:syn-iskeyword\| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings. A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest and a keyword can't contain anything else. Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match instead. The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters. The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different highlight group. Example: > :syn keyword vimCommand tag :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag < When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand" highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used. DEFINING MATCHES :syn-match :sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}] [excludenl] [keepend] {pattern} [{options}] This defines one match. {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment". [{options}] See \|:syn-arguments\| below. [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$" extend a containing match or region. Must be given before the pattern. \|:syn-excludenl\| keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a match with the end pattern. See \|:syn-keepend\|. {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match. See \|:syn-pattern\| below. Note that the pattern may match more than one line, which makes the match depend on where Vim starts searching for the pattern. You need to make sure syncing takes care of this. Example (match a character constant): > :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1 < DEFINING REGIONS :syn-region :syn-start :syn-skip :syn-end E398 E399 :sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}] [matchgroup={group-name}] [keepend] [extend] [excludenl] start={start_pattern} .. [skip={skip_pattern}] end={end_pattern} .. [{options}] This defines one region. It may span several lines. {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment". [{options}] See \|:syn-arguments\| below. [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following start or end pattern matches only. Not used for the text in between the matched start and end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using a different group for the start or end match. See \|:syn-matchgroup\|. keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a match with the end pattern. See \|:syn-keepend\|. extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region is contained in. See \|:syn-extend\|. excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$" extend a containing match or item. Only useful for end patterns. Must be given before the patterns it applies to. \|:syn-excludenl\| start={start_pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of the region. See \|:syn-pattern\| below. skip={skip_pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside the region where not to look for the end pattern. See \|:syn-pattern\| below. end={end_pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of the region. See \|:syn-pattern\| below. Example: > :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+ < The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order. There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign (although it mostly looks better without white space). When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for the end patterns. The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern. Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern. The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble. Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT work: > :syn region First start="(" end=":" :syn region Second start="(" end=";" < The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: > :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:" :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};" < This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible). :syn-keepend By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern. This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}" will then end the contained region, but not the outer region: { starts outer "{}" region { starts contained "{}" region } ends contained "{}" region } ends outer "{} region If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item. This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: > :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+ :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend < The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line, even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>. When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any contained matches. :syn-extend The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument. When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be extended. This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while others don't. Example: > :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]>+ contained :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]>+ contained extend < Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript item does extend the htmlRef item. Another example: > :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend < This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in. :syn-excludenl When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$' to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it: 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be used when all contained items must not extend the containing item. 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if only some contained items must not extend the containing item. "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to. :syn-matchgroup "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern differently than the body of the region. Example: > :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+ < This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in between with the "String" group. The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow, until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not using a matchgroup. In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern match that is highlighted with "matchgroup". Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in different colors: > :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2 :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen < E849 The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999. ============================================================================== 6. :syntax arguments :syn-arguments The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments. The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order and may be mixed with patterns. Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments can not be used for all commands: E395 contains oneline fold display extend concealends~ :syntax keyword - - - - - - :syntax match yes - yes yes yes - :syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes These arguments can be used for all three commands: conceal cchar contained containedin nextgroup transparent skipwhite skipnl skipempty conceal conceal :syn-conceal When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable. Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the 'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to edit the line. Another way to conceal text is with \|matchadd()\|. concealends :syn-concealends When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable. Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the 'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup" cchar :syn-cchar E844 The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be a control character such as Tab. Example: > :syntax match Entity "&" conceal cchar=& See \|hl-Conceal\| for highlighting. contained :syn-contained When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of another match. Example: > :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained :syntax match Comment "//." contains=Todo display :syn-display* If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting, by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is to be displayed. Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these conditions: - The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region for a "/" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next line. - The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or make it continue on the next line. - The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display", because it may make that preprocessor match shorter. - The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise, and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/" inside that comment would match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line. Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used: - match with a number - match with a label transparent :syn-transparent If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used only to skip over a part of the text. The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in, unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": > :syn match myString /'[^']'/ contains=myWord,myVim :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]\>/ contained :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE :hi link myString String :hi link myWord Comment Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent" argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow "myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Constant. This happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here. When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture: look from here \| \| \| \| \| \| V V V V V V xxxx yyy more contained items .................... contained item (transparent) ============================= first item The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a transparent group. What you see is: =======xxxx=======yyy======== Thus you look through the transparent "....". oneline :syn-oneline The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first line, otherwise the region doesn't even start. When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a line break. fold :syn-fold The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item. Example: > :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold :syn sync fromstart :set foldmethod=syntax This will make each {} block form one fold. The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold. The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds. {not available when Vim was compiled without \|+folding\| feature} :syn-contains E405 E406 E407 E408 E409 contains={group-name},.. The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used here. contains=ALL If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all groups will be accepted inside the item. contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},.. If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that are listed. Example: > :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function contains=TOP If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained" argument. contains=TOP,{group-name},.. Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed. contains=CONTAINED If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then all groups will be accepted that have the "contained" argument. contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},.. Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are listed. The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used). The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: > ... contains=Comment.,Keyw[0-3] The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the group names. The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used \|:syn-matchgroup\|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the area that is highlighted containedin={group-name}... :syn-containedin* The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item. The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above. This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading the C syntax: > :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top level. Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't work. nextgroup={group-name},.. :syn-nextgroup The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names, separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns). If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all other groups. Example: > :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a "Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. > Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf fff bbb fff bbb Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar. when "." would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see \|pattern\|). skipwhite :syn-skipwhite* skipnl :syn-skipnl skipempty :syn-skipempty These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text: skipwhite skip over space and tab characters skipnl skip over the end of a line skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl") When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no next group that matches the white space. When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after the current item in the same line. When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items. Example: > :syn match ifstart "\<if." nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty :syn match ifline "[^ \t]." nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained :syn match ifline "endif" contained Note that the "[^ \t]." match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes precedence. Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add "contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the example). IMPLICIT CONCEAL :syn-conceal-implicit* :sy[ntax] conceal [on\|off] This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords, matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region" defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be given explicitly. :sy[ntax] conceal Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off" (translated). ============================================================================== 7. Syntax patterns :syn-pattern E401 E402 In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: > :syntax region Comment start="/\" end="\/" :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+ See \|pattern\| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings. Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]". This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere. :syn-pattern-offset* The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern. The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}" The {what} can be one of seven strings: ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text me Match End offset for the end of the matched text hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern The {offset} can be: s start of the matched pattern s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left e end of the matched pattern e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left {nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3". Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used: ms me hs he rs re lc ~ match item yes yes yes yes - - yes region item start yes - yes - yes - yes region item skip - yes - - - - yes region item end - yes - yes - yes yes Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: > :syn match String /"[^"]"/hs=s+1,he=e-1 < some "string" text ^^^^^^ highlighted Notes: - There must be no white space between the pattern and the character offset(s). - The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text. - A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped. - Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters. This didn't work well for multi-byte characters, so it was changed with the Vim 7.2 release. - The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e. Example (match a comment but don't highlight the / and /): > :syntax region Comment start="/\"hs=e+1 end="\/"he=s-1 < / this is a comment / ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted A more complicated Example: > :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1 < abcfoostringbarabc mmmmmmmmmmm match sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar") Leading context :syn-lc* :syn-leading :syn-context Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the \|/\@<=\| construct in the pattern. The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: > :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1 :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1 :syn match Underline "_\+" < ___zzzz ___wwww ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset, unless you set "ms" explicitly. Multi-line patterns :syn-multi-line The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as expected, but there are a few exceptions. When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of the match doesn't move to another line. The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: > x x a b x x Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters after the "\n". External matches :syn-ext-match These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns: /\z( /\z(\) E50 E52 E879 \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable in defining a syntax region start pattern. /\z1 /\z2 /\z3 /\z4 /\z5 \z1 ... \z9 /\z6 /\z7 /\z8 /\z9 E66 E67 Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding sub-expression in a previous start pattern match. Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document example, for instance, can be done like this: > :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i\)" end="^\z1$" As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern, it marks the "\(\I\i\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can also be used in skip patterns: > :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1" Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa". Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)". Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches cannot be referred to. ============================================================================== 8. Syntax clusters :syn-cluster* E400 :sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..] [add={group-name}..] [remove={group-name}..] This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a single name. contains={group-name}.. The cluster is set to the specified list of groups. add={group-name}.. The specified groups are added to the cluster. remove={group-name}.. The specified groups are removed from the cluster. A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=.., nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents. Example: > :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2 As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so to speak: > :syntax keyword A aaa :syntax keyword B bbb :syntax cluster AandB contains=A :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff This also has implications for nested clusters: > :syntax keyword A aaa :syntax keyword B bbb :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff < E848 The maximum number of clusters is 9767. ============================================================================== 9. Including syntax files :syn-include E397 It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in two different ways: - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use the \|:runtime\| command: > " In cpp.vim: :runtime! syntax/c.vim :unlet b:current_syntax < - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the ":syntax include" command: :sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name} All syntax items declared in the included file will have the "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified, all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to that list. > " In perl.vim: :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod < When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR" or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'. All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file with his own version, without replacing the file that does the ":syn include". E847 The maximum number of includes is 999. ============================================================================== 10. Synchronizing :syn-sync E403 E404 Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where redrawing starts. :sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] \| minlines={N} \| ...] There are four ways to synchronize: 1. Always parse from the start of the file. \|:syn-sync-first\| 2. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment. \|:syn-sync-second\| 3. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there. \|:syn-sync-third\| 4. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on. \|:syn-sync-fourth\| :syn-sync-maxlines :syn-sync-minlines For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is limited by "minlines" and "maxlines". If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing. If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: > :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment < :syn-sync-linebreaks When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line break use this: > :syntax sync linebreaks=1 The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks". First syncing method: :syn-sync-first > :syntax sync fromstart The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text, so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However, when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst case: to the end of the file). Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number. Second syncing method: :syn-sync-second :syn-sync-ccomment For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given. Example: > :syntax sync ccomment When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"! An alternate group name can be specified, for example: > :syntax sync ccomment javaComment This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that region does have a start pattern "\/" and an end pattern "\/". The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few lines, but it hard to sync on). Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used that cross a line and contain a "/". Since letting strings cross a line is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the chance of a "/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction is hardly ever noticed. Third syncing method: :syn-sync-third For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given. Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower. Example: > :syntax sync minlines=50 "lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions). Fourth syncing method: :syn-sync-fourth The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there the search continues backwards in the file. This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences: - Keywords cannot be used. - The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups. - The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of forwards. - A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the consecutive that contain the continuation pattern. - When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or group of continued lines). - When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the line (or group of continued lines). - When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used. This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this /, the last "/" is used). There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used: 1. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions that cross lines cannot contain other regions. 2. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified. This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much slower, because more text needs to be parsed. Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time. Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to avoid finding unwanted matches. [The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much) faster.] syn-sync-grouphere E393 E394 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" .. Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used. "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match. syn-sync-groupthere :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" .. Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting. For example, in C you could search backwards for "/" and "/". If "/" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the "groupthere" is "cComment". If "/" is found first, you know that you are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice it's a bit more complicated, because the "/" and "/" could appear inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...). :syntax sync match .. :syntax sync region .. Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is skipped while searching for a sync point. syn-sync-linecont :syntax sync linecont {pattern} When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will consider the lines to be concatenated. If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: > :syntax sync maxlines=100 You can clear all sync settings with: > :syntax sync clear You can clear specific sync patterns with: > :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} .. ============================================================================== 11. Listing syntax items :syntax :sy :syn :syn-list This command lists all the syntax items: > :sy[ntax] [list] To show the syntax items for one syntax group: > :sy[ntax] list {group-name} To list the syntax groups in one cluster: E392 > :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name} See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command. Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn" is mostly used, because it looks better. ============================================================================== 12. Highlight command :highlight :hi E28 E411 E415 There are three types of highlight groups: - The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are linked to a group of the second type. - The ones used for all syntax languages. - The ones used for the 'highlight' option. hitest.vim You can see all the groups currently active with this command: > :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed in their own color. :colo :colorscheme E185 :colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme. This is basically the same as > :echo g:colors_name < In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will output "default". When compiled without the \|+eval\| feature it will output "unknown". :colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath' for the file "colors/{name}.vim". The first one that is found is loaded. Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below "start" and then under "opt". Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script. To customize a colorscheme use another name, e.g. "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load the original colorscheme: > runtime colors/evening.vim hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue < After the color scheme has been loaded the \|ColorScheme\| autocommand event is triggered. For info about writing a colorscheme file: > :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt :hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have attributes set. :hi[ghlight] {group-name} List one highlight group. :hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all highlighting for groups added by the user! Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which default colors to use. :hi[ghlight] clear {group-name} :hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It is _not_ set back to the default colors. :hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} .. Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for an existing group. See \|highlight-args\| for the {key}={arg} arguments. See \|:highlight-default\| for the optional [default] argument. Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to the default value. A simple way to change colors is with the \|:colorscheme\| command. This loads a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: > :hi Comment gui=bold Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the result is like this single command has been used: > :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold < :highlight-verbose When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will also tell where it was last set. Example: > :verbose hi Comment < Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~ Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~ When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be mentioned for the default values. See \|:verbose-cmd\| for more information. highlight-args E416 E417 E423 There are three types of terminals for highlighting: term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm) cterm a color terminal (MS-DOS console, color-xterm, these have the "Co" termcap entry) gui the GUI For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting. 1. highlight arguments for normal terminals bold underline undercurl inverse italic standout nocombine strikethrough term={attr-list} attr-list highlight-term E418 attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the following items (in any order): bold underline undercurl not always available strikethrough not always available reverse inverse same as reverse italic standout nocombine override attributes instead of combining them NONE no attributes used (used to reset it) Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They have the same effect. "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough" is only available in the GUI. The color is set with \|highlight-guisp\|. start={term-list} highlight-start E422 stop={term-list} term-list highlight-stop These lists of terminal codes can be used to get non-standard attributes on a terminal. The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument is written before the characters in the highlighted area. It can be anything that you want to send to the terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence specified with the "stop" argument is written after the highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument. Otherwise the screen will look messed up. The {term-list} can have two forms: 1. A string with escape sequences. This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example: start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r; 2. A list of terminal codes. Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas. White space is not allowed. Example: start=t_C1,t_BL The terminal codes must exist for this to work. 2. highlight arguments for color terminals cterm={attr-list} highlight-cterm See above for the description of {attr-list} \|attr-list\|. The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue. Note: Many terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes with coloring. Use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg=" OR "ctermbg=". ctermfg={color-nr} highlight-ctermfg E421 ctermbg={color-nr} highlight-ctermbg The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co". The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives another color, on others you just get color 3. For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file. Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors for each user. See \|xterm-color\| for info about color xterms. The MSDOS standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so these have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in X11 are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The following names are recognized, with the color number used: cterm-colors NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~ 0 0 Black 1 4 DarkBlue 2 2 DarkGreen 3 6 DarkCyan 4 1 DarkRed 5 5 DarkMagenta 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey 9 4* Blue, LightBlue 10 2* Green, LightGreen 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan 12 1* Red, LightRed 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow 15 7* White The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co' greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '' indicates that the bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g., "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work for background colors! Without the '' the bold attribute is removed. If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use a number instead of a color name. The case of the color names is ignored. Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '' means 'add 8' so that Blue is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc. Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong colors! You can also use "NONE" to remove the color. :hi-normal-cterm* When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group, these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text. Example: > :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue < When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the 'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set explicitly. This causes the highlight groups that depend on 'background' to change! This means you should set the colors for Normal first, before setting other colors. When a colorscheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this. When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op" termcap entry \|t_op\|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the 't_op' option in your .vimrc. E419 E420 When Vim knows the normal foreground and background colors, "fg" and "bg" can be used as color names. This only works after setting the colors for the Normal group and for the MS-DOS console. Example, for reverse video: > :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg < Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this command are given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted. 3. highlight arguments for the GUI gui={attr-list} highlight-gui These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode. See \|attr-list\| for a description. Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They have the same effect. Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group. font={font-name} highlight-font font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: > font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1 < The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font. When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is used). The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs: When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed. When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be changed. All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will occur. To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character, put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then. Example: > :hi comment font='Monospace 10' guifg={color-name} highlight-guifg guibg={color-name} highlight-guibg guisp={color-name} highlight-guisp These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl and strikethrough. There are a few special names: NONE no color (transparent) bg use normal background color background use normal background color fg use normal foreground color foreground use normal foreground color To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character, put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then. Example: > :hi comment guifg='salmon pink' < gui-colors Suggested color names (these are available on most systems): Red LightRed DarkRed Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow Gray LightGray DarkGray Black White Orange Purple Violet In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See \|win32-colors\|. You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values. The format is "#rrggbb", where "rr" is the Red value "gg" is the Green value "bb" is the Blue value All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: > :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff < highlight-groups highlight-default These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the 'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight" command. hl-ColorColumn ColorColumn used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn' hl-Conceal Conceal placeholder characters substituted for concealed text (see 'conceallevel') hl-Cursor Cursor the character under the cursor hl-CursorIM CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode \|CursorIM\| hl-CursorColumn CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is set hl-CursorLine CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is set hl-Directory Directory directory names (and other special names in listings) hl-DiffAdd DiffAdd diff mode: Added line \|diff.txt\| hl-DiffChange DiffChange diff mode: Changed line \|diff.txt\| hl-DiffDelete DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line \|diff.txt\| hl-DiffText DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line \|diff.txt\| hl-EndOfBuffer EndOfBuffer filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer. By default, this is highlighted like \|hl-NonText\|. hl-ErrorMsg ErrorMsg error messages on the command line hl-VertSplit VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows hl-Folded Folded line used for closed folds hl-FoldColumn FoldColumn 'foldcolumn' hl-SignColumn SignColumn column where \|signs\| are displayed hl-IncSearch IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with ":s///c" hl-LineNr LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set. hl-CursorLineNr CursorLineNr Like LineNr when 'cursorline' or 'relativenumber' is set for the cursor line. hl-MatchParen MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it is a paired bracket, and its match. \|pi_paren.txt\| hl-ModeMsg ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --") hl-MoreMsg MoreMsg \|more-prompt\| hl-NonText NonText '@' at the end of the window, characters from 'showbreak' and other characters that do not really exist in the text (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't fit at the end of the line). hl-Normal Normal normal text hl-Pmenu Pmenu Popup menu: normal item. hl-PmenuSel PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item. hl-PmenuSbar PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar. hl-PmenuThumb PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar. hl-Question Question \|hit-enter\| prompt and yes/no questions hl-QuickFixLine QuickFixLine Current \|quickfix\| item in the quickfix window. hl-Search Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch'). Also used for similar items that need to stand out. hl-SpecialKey SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'. Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it really is. hl-SpellBad SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. \|spell\| This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. hl-SpellCap SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. \|spell\| This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. hl-SpellLocal SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is used in another region. \|spell\| This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. hl-SpellRare SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is hardly ever used. \|spell\| This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. hl-StatusLine StatusLine status line of current window hl-StatusLineNC StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in the status line of the current window. hl-StatusLineTerm StatusLineTerm status line of current window, if it is a \|terminal\| window. hl-StatusLineTermNC StatusLineTermNC status lines of not-current windows that is a \|terminal\| window. hl-TabLine TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label hl-TabLineFill TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels hl-TabLineSel TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label hl-Terminal Terminal \|terminal\| window (see \|terminal-size-color\|) hl-Title Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc. hl-Visual Visual Visual mode selection hl-VisualNOS VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection". Only X11 Gui's \|gui-x11\| and \|xterm-clipboard\| supports this. hl-WarningMsg WarningMsg warning messages hl-WildMenu WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion hl-User1 hl-User1..9 hl-User9 The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9. For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu, scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg, and guifg. hl-Menu Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus. Also used for the toolbar. Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg. NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is empty, and as such it is tied to the current \|:language\| when set. hl-Scrollbar Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's scrollbars. Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg. hl-Tooltip Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips. Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg. NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is empty, and as such it is tied to the current \|:language\| when set. ============================================================================== 13. Linking groups :hi-link :highlight-link E412 E413 When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight group, and give the color attributes only for that group. To set a link: :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group} To remove a link: :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE Notes: E414 - If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You don't get an error message for a non-existing group. - As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is removed. - If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip links for groups that already have settings. :hi-default :highlight-default The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link. Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: > :highlight default link cComment Comment If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: > :highlight link cComment Question Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be overruled when the syntax file is loaded. ============================================================================== 14. Cleaning up :syn-clear E391 If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this command: > :syntax clear This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting, or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that load the syntax file. The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is loaded after this command. If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove the autocommands that load the syntax files: > :syntax off What this command actually does, is executing the command > :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work $VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See \|$VIMRUNTIME\|. To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: > :syntax clear {group-name} .. This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}. To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: > :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} .. This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list. :syntax-reset :syn-reset If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the defaults back: > :syntax reset It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only affects the highlighting. This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option. Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset back to their Vim default. Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost. What this actually does is: > let g:syntax_cmd = "reset" runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option. syncolor If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in 'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax reset" command. For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: > if &background == "light" highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen else highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green endif E679 Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the 'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an endless loop. Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This depends on the color scheme file. See \|:colorscheme\|. syntax_cmd The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded: "on" ":syntax on" command. Highlight colors are overruled but links are kept "enable" ":syntax enable" command. Only define colors for groups that don't have highlighting yet. Use ":syntax default". "reset" ":syntax reset" command or loading a color scheme. Define all the colors. "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set them. ============================================================================== 15. Highlighting tags tag-highlight If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following mappings. <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags. <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file. > :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]:\)\=\([^ ]\)./syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12> :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR> WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more memory Vim will consume. Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net). Put these lines in your Makefile: # Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk types: types.vim types.vim: .[ch] ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- .[ch] \|\ awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\ {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@ And put these lines in your .vimrc: > " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile .[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim' autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile .[ch] if filereadable(fname) autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile .[ch] exe 'so ' . fname autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile .[ch] endif ============================================================================== 16. Window-local syntax :ownsyntax* Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold, italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here. To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other windows on the buffer: > :ownsyntax foo < w:current_syntax This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of "b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set "b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to "w:current_syntax". Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options. Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely, syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the same buffer. A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded. When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax. ============================================================================== 17. Color xterms xterm-color color-xterm Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: > :if &term =~ "xterm" : if has("terminfo") : set t_Co=8 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm : else : set t_Co=8 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm : endif :endif < [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal, e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm". Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may be wrong. xiterm rxvt The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too. But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: > :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm < colortest.vim To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution. To use it, execute this command: > :runtime syntax/colortest.vim Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground colors, when 't_Co' is 8. xfree-xterm To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version at: > http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it supports. > ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings. (Also see \|UTF8-xterm\| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding). This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): > :if has("terminfo") : set t_Co=16 : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm :else : set t_Co=16 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm :endif < [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] Without \|+terminfo\|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm". Colors above 16 are also translated automatically. For 256 colors this has been reported to work: > :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color" and try if that works. You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file): XTermcolor0: #000000 XTermcolor1: #c00000 XTermcolor2: #008000 XTermcolor3: #808000 XTermcolor4: #0000c0 XTermcolor5: #c000c0 XTermcolor6: #008080 XTermcolor7: #c0c0c0 XTermcolor8: #808080 XTermcolor9: #ff6060 XTermcolor10: #00ff00 XTermcolor11: #ffff00 XTermcolor12: #8080ff XTermcolor13: #ff40ff XTermcolor14: #00ffff XTermcolor15: #ffffff XtermcursorColor: Black [Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.] To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): > xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults < xterm-blink* xterm-blinking-cursor To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with these resources: XTermcursorBlink: on XTermcursorOnTime: 400 XTermcursorOffTime: 250 XTermcursorColor: White hpterm-color These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8 foreground colors: > :if has("terminfo") : set t_Co=8 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S :else : set t_Co=8 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S :endif < [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] Eterm enlightened-terminal These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. > :set t_Co=16 :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m < TTpro-telnet These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware / open-source program for MS-Windows. > set t_Co=16 set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled. (info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>) ============================================================================== 18. When syntax is slow :syntime This is aimed at authors of a syntax file. If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it faster. To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such as 'relativenumber' and \|folding\|. Note: this is only available when compiled with the \|+profile\| feature. You many need to build Vim with "huge" features. To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this sequence: > :syntime on [ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ] :syntime report This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time it took to match them against the text. :syntime on Start measuring syntax times. This will add some overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern matching. :syntime off Stop measuring syntax times. :syntime clear Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring. :syntime report Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the current window. Use a wider display to see more of the output. The list is sorted by total time. The columns are: TOTAL Total time in seconds spent on matching this pattern. COUNT Number of times the pattern was used. MATCH Number of times the pattern actually matched SLOWEST The longest time for one try. AVERAGE The average time for one try. NAME Name of the syntax item. Note that this is not unique. PATTERN The pattern being used. Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives. Try to include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a pattern does NOT match. When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at all positions in the current and previous line. For example, if the item is literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes): "<\@<=span" Matches "span" in "<span". This tries matching with "<" in many places. "<\@1<=span" Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span". vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:ft=help:norl: Back

Edit File : syntax.txt | Size : 212.37 KB

*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2018 Jan 31

VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar

Syntax highlighting		*syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring*

Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or
color.	Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern.  Vim
doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its
limitations.  Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody
calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that.

Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals.  But since most ordinary
terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the
GUI version, gvim.

In the User Manual:
|usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting.
|usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file.

{Vi does not have any of these commands}

Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been
disabled at compile time.

==============================================================================
1. Quick start						*:syn-qstart*

*:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable*
This command switches on syntax highlighting: >

:syntax enable

What this command actually does is to execute the command >
	:source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim

If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find
the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|).  Usually this works just
fine.  If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the
directory where the Vim stuff is located.  For example, if your syntax files
are in the "/usr/vim/vim50/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to
"/usr/vim/vim50".  You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim.
This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or
will start soon.  See |'go-M'| about avoiding that.

*:syn-on* *:syntax-on*
The `:syntax enable` command will keep your current color settings.  This
allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or
after using this command.  If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the
defaults, use: >
	:syntax on
<
					*:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal*
If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background
with: >
	:highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White
For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|.
For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|.

NOTE: The syntax files on MS-DOS and Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>.
The files for Unix end in <NL>.  This means you should use the right type of
file for your system.  Although on MS-DOS and Windows the right format is
automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty.

NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value
of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after
reading the |gvimrc|.  This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be
used.  To set the default value of 'background' before switching on
highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: >

:gui		" open window and set default for 'background'
   :syntax on	" start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors

NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the
foreground!  Use ":gui -f" then.

*g:syntax_on*
You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: >
   :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif

To put this into a mapping, you can use: >
   :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar>
	\   syntax off <Bar>
	\ else <Bar>
	\   syntax enable <Bar>
	\ endif <CR>
[using the |<>| notation, type this literally]

Details:
The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file.  To see exactly how
this works, look in the file:
    command		file ~
    :syntax enable	$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
    :syntax on		$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
    :syntax manual	$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim
    :syntax off		$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
Also see |syntax-loading|.

NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting
makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value.

==============================================================================
2. Syntax files						*:syn-files*

The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in
a syntax file.	The name convention is: "{name}.vim".  Where {name} is the
name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters,
a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem).
Examples:
	c.vim		perl.vim	java.vim	html.vim
	cpp.vim		sh.vim		csh.vim

The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file.  But
the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included.  When a
language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one,
for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: >
   :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim

The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand.  For example: >
   :au Syntax c	    runtime! syntax/c.vim
   :au Syntax cpp   runtime! syntax/cpp.vim
These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim.

MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES				*mysyntaxfile*

When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these
automatically with ":syntax enable", do this:

1. Create your user runtime directory.	You would normally use the first item
   of the 'runtimepath' option.  Example for Unix: >
	mkdir ~/.vim

2. Create a directory in there called "syntax".  For Unix: >
	mkdir ~/.vim/syntax

3. Write the Vim syntax file.  Or download one from the internet.  Then write
   it in your syntax directory.  For example, for the "mine" syntax: >
	:w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim

Now you can start using your syntax file manually: >
	:set syntax=mine
You don't have to exit Vim to use this.

If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|.

If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user
to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'.

ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE		*mysyntaxfile-add*

If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to
add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps:

1. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above.

2. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax".  For Unix: >
	mkdir ~/.vim/after
	mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax

3. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use.  For
   example, to change the colors for the C syntax: >
	highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green

4. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory.  Use the name of the
   syntax, with ".vim" added.  For our C syntax: >
	:w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim

That's it.  The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be
different.  You don't even have to restart Vim.

If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name.
All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example:
	~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim
	~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim

REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE			*mysyntaxfile-replace*

If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new
version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above.  Just make sure
that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'.
Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets
b:current_syntax.

NAMING CONVENTIONS		    *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18*

A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of
thing.  These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color.
A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself.

The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits
and the underscore.  As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*".  However, Vim does not give
an error when using other characters.

To be able to allow each user to pick his favorite set of colors, there must
be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages.
These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly
you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"):

*Comment	any comment

*Constant	any constant
	 String		a string constant: "this is a string"
	 Character	a character constant: 'c', '\n'
	 Number		a number constant: 234, 0xff
	 Boolean	a boolean constant: TRUE, false
	 Float		a floating point constant: 2.3e10

*Identifier	any variable name
	 Function	function name (also: methods for classes)

*Statement	any statement
	 Conditional	if, then, else, endif, switch, etc.
	 Repeat		for, do, while, etc.
	 Label		case, default, etc.
	 Operator	"sizeof", "+", "*", etc.
	 Keyword	any other keyword
	 Exception	try, catch, throw

*PreProc	generic Preprocessor
	 Include	preprocessor #include
	 Define		preprocessor #define
	 Macro		same as Define
	 PreCondit	preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc.

*Type		int, long, char, etc.
	 StorageClass	static, register, volatile, etc.
	 Structure	struct, union, enum, etc.
	 Typedef	A typedef

*Special	any special symbol
	 SpecialChar	special character in a constant
	 Tag		you can use CTRL-] on this
	 Delimiter	character that needs attention
	 SpecialComment	special things inside a comment
	 Debug		debugging statements

*Underlined	text that stands out, HTML links

*Ignore		left blank, hidden  |hl-Ignore|

*Error		any erroneous construct

*Todo		anything that needs extra attention; mostly the
			keywords TODO FIXME and XXX

The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups.
For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting.
The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same
highlighting.  You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands
after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file.

Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive.  "String" and "string"
can be used for the same group.

The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name:
	NONE   ALL   ALLBUT   contains	 contained

*hl-Ignore*
When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal
mechanism.  See |conceal|.

==============================================================================
3. Syntax loading procedure				*syntax-loading*

This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is
issued.  When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are
located.  This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|.

":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following:

Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
    |
    +-	Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
    |
    +-	Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath'
    |	|
    |	+-  Setup the colors for syntax highlighting.  If a color scheme is
    |	|   defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}".  Otherwise
    |	|   ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used.  ":syntax on" overrules
    |	|   existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't
    |	|   set yet.
    |	|
    |	+-  Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when
    |	|   the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1*
    |	|
    |	+-  Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable.
    |	    This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2*
    |
    +-	Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim".  It loads any
    |	filetype.vim files found.  It should always Source
    |	$VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following.
    |	|
    |	+-  Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option
    |	|   This is where the connection between file name and file type is
    |	|   made for known file types. *synload-3*
    |	|
    |	+-  Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile*
    |	|   variable.  This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
    |	|   *synload-4*
    |	|
    |	+-  Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file
    |	|   type was detected yet. *synload-5*
    |	|
    |	+-  Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim|
    |
    +-	Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file
    |	type has been detected. *synload-6*
    |
    +-	Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each
	already loaded buffer.

Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows:

==============================================================================
4. Syntax file remarks					*:syn-file-remarks*

*b:current_syntax-variable*
Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the
"b:current_syntax" variable.  You can use this if you want to load other
settings, depending on which syntax is active.	Example: >
   :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh"
   :au BufReadPost *   do-some-things
   :au BufReadPost * endif

2HTML						*2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML*

This is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current
window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file.

After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The
colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim.  With
|g:html_line_ids| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123
or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with
|g:html_dynamic_folds| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded
in Vim.

You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"!
Source the script to convert the current file: >

:runtime! syntax/2html.vim
<
Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off
options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to
the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using
|:unlet|.

Remarks:
- Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors.
- From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)!
- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some
  features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be
  incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in.

Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a
Unix shell: >
   for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done
<
					*g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line*
To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first
and last line to be converted.  Example, using the last set Visual area: >

:let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
	:let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
	:runtime! syntax/2html.vim
<
							*:TOhtml*
:[range]TOhtml		The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
			This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
			range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line|
			and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the
			range, respectively. Default range is the entire
			buffer.

If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
			|g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
			all windows which are part of the diff in the current
			tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
			in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can
			jump to lines in specific windows with (for example)
			#W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or
			#W3L87 for line 87 in the third.

Examples: >

:10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html
	:'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection
	:TOhtml      " convert entire buffer
<
							*g:html_diff_one_file*
Default: 0.
When 0, and using |:TOhtml| all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab
page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When
1, only the current buffer is converted.
Example: >

let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
<
							 *g:html_whole_filler*
Default: 0.
When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines
is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number
of inserted lines.
When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were
not set.
>
    :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
<
				     *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress*
Default: 0.
When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the
2html.vim conversion process.
When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement
but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big
files it can take a long time!
Example: >

let g:html_no_progress = 1
<
You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not
run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script
moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: >

vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c
<
Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you
need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML
conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a
script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of
specifying each command separately.

*g:html_number_lines*
Default: current 'number' setting.
When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering.
When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same
highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|).
Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: >
   :let g:html_number_lines = 1
Force to omit the line numbers: >
   :let g:html_number_lines = 0
Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
   :unlet g:html_number_lines
<
                                                             *g:html_line_ids*
Default: 1 if |g:html_number_lines| is set, 0 otherwise.
When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span>
inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute
takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view
pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff
view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds
(|g:html_dynamic_folds|) containing the specified line before jumping. The
javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L.
For example: >

page.html#L123	jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file
	page.html#123	does the same

diff.html#W1L42	jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff
	diff.html#42	does the same
<
							      *g:html_use_css*
Default: 1.
When 1, generate valid HTML 4.01 markup with CSS1 styling, supported in all
modern browsers and most old browsers.
When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not
recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients,
forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable.
Example: >
   :let g:html_use_css = 0
<
						       *g:html_ignore_conceal*
Default: 0.
When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character
from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current
value of 'conceallevel'.
When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is
|conceal|ed.

Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is
included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): >
   :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
   :setl conceallevel=0
<
						       *g:html_ignore_folding*
Default: 0.
When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in
Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow
the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside.
When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the
text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect.

Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included
in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): >
   zR
   :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
<
							*g:html_dynamic_folds*
Default: 0.
When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML.
When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like
in Vim.

Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling,
regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to.

This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set.
>
   :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
<
							*g:html_no_foldcolumn*
Default: 0.
When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to
Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds
open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current
'foldcolumn' setting.
When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over
folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set.
>
   :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
<
				*TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy*
Default: empty string.
This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied,
when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful
for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or
line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be
affected in this way as follows:
	f:	fold column
	n:	line numbers (also within fold text)
	t:	fold text
	d:	diff filler

Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: >
	:let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn"
<
This feature is currently implemented by inserting read-only <input> elements
into the markup to contain the uncopyable areas. This does not work well in
all cases. When pasting to some applications which understand HTML, the
<input> elements also get pasted. But plain-text paste destinations should
always work.

*g:html_no_invalid*
Default: 0.
When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, an invalid attribute is
intentionally inserted into the <input> element for the uncopyable areas. This
increases the number of applications you can paste to without also pasting the
<input> elements. Specifically, Microsoft Word will not paste the <input>
elements if they contain this invalid attribute.
When 1, no invalid markup is ever intentionally inserted, and the generated
page should validate. However, be careful pasting into Microsoft Word when
|g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty; it can be hard to get rid of the <input>
elements which get pasted.

*g:html_hover_unfold*
Default: 0.
When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with
|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column.
When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse
cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with
disabled javascript to view the folded text.

Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this
feature.  Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the
normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but
they will not be openable without a foldcolumn.
>
   :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
<
							      *g:html_id_expr*
Default: ""
Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document
to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no
longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can
evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document,
so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a
larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: >

:let g:html_id_expr = '"_".bufnr("%")'
<
To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: >

:let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"'
<
Note, when converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be
evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the
windows.

*TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap*
Default: current 'wrap' setting.
When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does
not wrap at the edge of the browser window.
When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser
window.
Explicitly enable text wrapping: >
   :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
Explicitly disable wrapping: >
   :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: >
   :unlet g:html_pre_wrap
<
							       *g:html_no_pre*
Default: 0.
When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre>
tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab
characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|).
When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is
used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of &nbsp; character
references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow
text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in
old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and
the rendered page generated by 2html.vim.
>
   :let g:html_no_pre = 1
<
							  *g:html_expand_tabs*
Default: 1 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, and no fold column or line
		numbers occur in the generated HTML;
	 0 otherwise.
When 0, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate
number of space characters, or &nbsp; references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1.
When 1, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text
are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to
allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in
the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and
indentation in the HTML, unless set by default.

Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: >
   :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
<
Force tabs to be expanded: >
   :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
<
				    *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding*
It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with
|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server.

If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name
for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not.
'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be
set to match the chosen document encoding.

Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in
|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with
wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific
encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options
below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names.

Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in
the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C:

http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings
	http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark

*g:html_use_encoding*
Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above.
To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to
something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a
webserver: >
   :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): >
   :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding|
variable: >
   :unlet g:html_use_encoding
<
						    *g:html_encoding_override*
Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
		mentioned by name at |encoding-names|.
This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you
specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default
list of conversions.

This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs.

Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": >
   :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
<
						     *g:html_charset_override*
Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
		mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide
		browser support.
This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any
'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also
use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example,
TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16
and UTF-32 instead, use: >
   :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}

Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
compatibility problems with some major browsers.

*g:html_font*
Default: "monospace"
You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using
g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be
surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list
item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either
way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire
result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS).
Examples: >

" font-family: 'Consolas', monospace;
   :let g:html_font = "Consolas"

" font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace;
   :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"]
<
			*convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
Default: 0.
When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML).
>
    :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
<

ABEL						*abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax*

ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options.  To enable them, assign
any value to the respective variable.  Example: >
	:let abel_obsolete_ok=1
To disable them use ":unlet".  Example: >
	:unlet abel_obsolete_ok

Variable			Highlight ~
abel_obsolete_ok		obsolete keywords are statements, not errors
abel_cpp_comments_illegal	do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader

ADA

See |ft-ada-syntax|

ANT						*ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax*

The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python
by default.  Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed
by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument
and the script syntax file name as second argument.  Example: >

:call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim')

will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code >

See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently.

APACHE						*apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax*

The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server
version 2.2.3.

*asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k*
ASSEMBLY	*ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax*
		*ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim*

Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly.  If the automatic detection
doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
startup vimrc: >
   :let filetype_i = "asm"
Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use.

There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name
extensions.  Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a
line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize.  Currently these syntax
files are included:
	asm		GNU assembly (the default)
	asm68k		Motorola 680x0 assembly
	asmh8300	Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly
	ia64		Intel Itanium 64
	fasm		Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net)
	masm		Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86)
	nasm		Netwide assembly
	tasm		Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and
			MMX)
	pic		PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84)

The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: >
	asmsyntax=nasm
Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax.  This line must be
one of the first five lines in the file.  No non-white text must be
immediately before or after this text.  Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is
equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict
between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in
particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax
highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax).

The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the
b:asmsyntax variable: >
	:let b:asmsyntax = "nasm"

If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of
the global variable asmsyntax is used.	This can be seen as a default assembly
language: >
	:let asmsyntax = "nasm"

As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used.

Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~

To enable a feature: >
	:let   {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm
To disable a feature: >
	:unlet {variable}  |set syntax=nasm

Variable		Highlight ~
nasm_loose_syntax	unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error
			  (parser dependent; not recommended)
nasm_ctx_outside_macro	contexts outside macro not as Error
nasm_no_warn		potentially risky syntax not as ToDo

ASPPERL and ASPVBS			*ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax*

*.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script.  Since it's
hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are
using.	For Perl script use: >
	:let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl"
	:let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl"
For Visual Basic use: >
	:let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs"
	:let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs"

BAAN						    *baan.vim* *baan-syntax*

The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV upto SSA ERP LN
for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants
are supported.

Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify
in ones |.vimrc|: >
	let baan_code_stds=1

*baan-folding*

Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables
mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on
source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive.

To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: >
	let baan_fold=1
Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The
indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not
considered equal to a tab). >
	let baan_fold_block=1
Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO,
SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to
match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). >
	let baan_fold_sql=1
Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set|
the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in
.../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: >
	set foldminlines=5
	set foldnestmax=6

BASIC			*basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax*

Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas".	To detect
which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first
five lines of the file.  If it is not found, filetype will be "basic",
otherwise "vb".  Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual
Basic.

C							*c.vim* *ft-c-syntax*

A few things in C highlighting are optional.  To enable them assign any value
to the respective variable.  Example: >
	:let c_comment_strings = 1
To disable them use ":unlet".  Example: >
	:unlet c_comment_strings

Variable		Highlight ~
*c_gnu*			GNU gcc specific items
*c_comment_strings*	strings and numbers inside a comment
*c_space_errors*		trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab>
*c_no_trail_space_error*	 ... but no trailing spaces
*c_no_tab_space_error*	 ... but no spaces before a <Tab>
*c_no_bracket_error*	don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors
*c_no_curly_error*	don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors;
				except { and } in first column
				Default is to highlight them, otherwise you
				can't spot a missing ")".
*c_curly_error*		highlight a missing }; this forces syncing from the
			start of the file, can be slow
*c_no_ansi*		don't do standard ANSI types and constants
*c_ansi_typedefs*		 ... but do standard ANSI types
*c_ansi_constants*	 ... but do standard ANSI constants
*c_no_utf*		don't highlight \u and \U in strings
*c_syntax_for_h*		for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
			syntax instead of objcpp
*c_no_if0*		don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
*c_no_cformat*		don't highlight %-formats in strings
*c_no_c99*		don't highlight C99 standard items
*c_no_c11*		don't highlight C11 standard items
*c_no_bsd*		don't highlight BSD specific types

When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
become a fold.  If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
	:let c_no_comment_fold = 1
"#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: >
	:let c_no_if0_fold = 1

If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable
to a larger number: >
	:let c_minlines = 100
This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first
displayed line.  The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set).  The
disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow.

When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only
works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window.  If
you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly.

To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster.
Example: >
   :au Syntax c call MyCadd()
   :function MyCadd()
   :  syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni
   :  syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem
   :  hi link cMyItem Title
   :endfun

ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group.	This includes
"NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others.  But not "TRUE", for example, because this is
not in the ANSI standard.  If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant
highlighting: >
	:hi link cConstant NONE

If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the
highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket.

If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file
in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'.  For Unix this would be
~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. >
    syn sync fromstart
    set foldmethod=syntax

CH						*ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax*

C/C++ interpreter.  Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon
the C syntax file.  See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C.

By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead
of C or C++: >
	:let ch_syntax_for_h = 1

CHILL						*chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax*

Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C.  See |c.vim| for all the settings
that are available.  Additionally there is:

chill_space_errors	like c_space_errors
chill_comment_string	like c_comment_strings
chill_minlines		like c_minlines

CHANGELOG				*changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax*

ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line.
If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: >
	let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0
This works the next time you edit a changelog file.  You can also use
"b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax
file).

You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: >
	:hi link ChangelogError Error
Or to avoid the highlighting: >
	:hi link ChangelogError NONE
This works immediately.

CLOJURE							*ft-clojure-syntax*

The default syntax groups can be augmented through the
*g:clojure_syntax_keywords* and *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* variables. The
value should be a |Dictionary| of syntax group names to a |List| of custom
identifiers:
>
	let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = {
	    \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"],
	    \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"]
	    \ }
<
Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names.

If the |buffer-variable| *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* is set, only
language constants and special forms are matched.

Setting *g:clojure_fold* enables folding Clojure code via the syntax engine.
Any list, vector, or map that extends over more than one line can be folded
using the standard Vim |fold-commands|.

Please note that this option does not work with scripts that redefine the
bracket syntax regions, such as rainbow-parentheses plugins.

This option is off by default.
>
	" Default
	let g:clojure_fold = 0
<

COBOL						*cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax*

COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh
development.  This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance
versus development) and other factors.	To enable legacy code highlighting,
add this line to your .vimrc: >
	:let cobol_legacy_code = 1
To disable it again, use this: >
	:unlet cobol_legacy_code

COLD FUSION			*coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax*

The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments.  To turn on ColdFusion
comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >

:let html_wrong_comments = 1

The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file.

CPP						*cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax*

Most of things are same as |ft-c-syntax|.

Variable		Highlight ~
cpp_no_cpp11		don't highlight C++11 standard items
cpp_no_cpp14		don't highlight C++14 standard items

CSH						*csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax*

This covers the shell named "csh".  Note that on some systems tcsh is actually
used.

Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard.  Some systems
symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish
between csh and tcsh.  In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the
"filetype_csh" variable.  For using csh:  *g:filetype_csh*
>
	:let g:filetype_csh = "csh"

For using tcsh: >

:let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh"

Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc,
tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh.  All other tcsh/csh scripts
will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists.  If the
"filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the
variable.

CYNLIB						*cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax*

Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable
hardware modelling and simulation using C++.  Typically Cynlib files have a .cc
or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a
normal C++ file.  Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this
line to your .vimrc file: >

:let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1

Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) >

:let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1

To disable these again, use this: >

:unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc
	:unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp
<

CWEB						*cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax*

Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb.  If the automatic detection
doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
startup vimrc: >
   :let filetype_w = "cweb"

DESKTOP					   *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax*

Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files
according to freedesktop.org standard:
http://standards.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/
But actually almost none implements this standard fully.  Thus it will
highlight all Unix ini files.  But you can force strict highlighting according
to standard by placing this in your vimrc file: >
	:let enforce_freedesktop_standard = 1

DIFF							*diff.vim*

The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers.  This can be slow if
there are very long lines in the file.  To disable translations: >

:let diff_translations = 0

Also see |diff-slow|.

DIRCOLORS			       *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax*

The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option.  It exists to
provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of
the command.  It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most
versions.  On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and
uses them for processing.  To enable the Slackware keywords add the following
line to your startup file: >
	let dircolors_is_slackware = 1

DOCBOOK					*docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook*
DOCBOOK XML				*docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax*
DOCBOOK SGML				*docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax*

There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML.  To specify what type you
are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set.  Vim does this for you
automatically if it can recognize the type.  When Vim can't guess it the type
defaults to XML.
You can set the type manually: >
	:let docbk_type = "sgml"
or: >
	:let docbk_type = "xml"
You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated.
Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": >
	:set filetype=docbksgml
or: >
	:set filetype=docbkxml

You can specify the DocBook version: >
	:let docbk_ver = 3
When not set 4 is used.

DOSBATCH				*dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax*

There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files.	This covers new
extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and
is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion.  For Windows NT
this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2.
Select the version you want with the following line: >

:let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1

If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support
Windows 2000.

A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type
"dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files).  The latter
is used by default.  You may select the former with the following line: >

:let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1

If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected.

DOXYGEN						*doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax*

Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format
(similar to Javadoc).  This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp,
idl and php files, and should also work with java.

There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done
explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file.
Example: >
	:set syntax=c.doxygen
or >
	// vim:syntax=c.doxygen

It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting
the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax.  This is done by
adding the following to your .vimrc. >
	:let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1

There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and
are to do with non-standard highlighting options.

Variable			Default	Effect ~
g:doxygen_enhanced_color
g:doxygen_enhanced_colour	0	Use non-standard highlighting for
					doxygen comments.

doxygen_my_rendering		0	Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic
					and html_my_rendering underline.

doxygen_javadoc_autobrief	1	Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief
					colour highlighting.

doxygen_end_punctuation		'[.]'	Set to regexp match for the ending
					punctuation of brief

There are also some hilight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in
configuration.

Highlight			Effect ~
doxygenErrorComment		The colour of an end-comment when missing
				punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section
doxygenLinkError		The colour of an end-comment when missing the
				\endlink from a \link section.

DTD						*dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax*

The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default.  To disable
case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >

:let dtd_ignore_case=1

The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors.  If
this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: >

:let dtd_no_tag_errors=1

before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file.
Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the
'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'.
Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant'
highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the
delimiters % and ;.  This can be turned off by setting: >

:let dtd_no_param_entities=1

The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's.

EIFFEL					*eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax*

While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the
syntax highlighting file encourages their use.  This also allows to
highlight class names differently.  If you want to disable case-sensitive
highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >

:let eiffel_ignore_case=1

Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments.

Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: >

:let eiffel_strict=1
	:let eiffel_pedantic=1

Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the
five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and
"NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names.

Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style
guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and
lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords).

If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void",
"Result", and "Precursor", you can use >

:let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1

instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off.

Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already
experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: >

:let eiffel_ise=1

Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants.  To handle them, add >

:let eiffel_hex_constants=1

to your startup file.

EUPHORIA	    *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax*

Two syntax highlighting files exists for Euphoria. One for Euphoria 
version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for 
Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later.

Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary 
for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4 
(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support.

The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type: 
    
	*.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw
	*.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW

To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for 
auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type,
add the following line to your startup file: >

:let filetype_euphoria="euphoria3"

:let filetype_euphoria="euphoria4"

ERLANG						*erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax*

Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson.  Files with
the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws.

The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this,
put the following line in your vimrc: >

:let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0

To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: >

:let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1

FLEXWIKI				*flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax*

FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com
NOTE: this site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that
development stopped in 2009.

Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki
syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make
editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the
start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length),
'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak'
(to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen),
and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default.

If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys
move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: >
	:let flexwiki_maps = 1

FORM						*form.vim* *ft-form-syntax*

The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default
modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String,
following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by
J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991.

If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to
redefine the following syntax groups:

- formConditional
    - formNumber
    - formStatement
    - formHeaderStatement
    - formComment
    - formPreProc
    - formDirective
    - formType
    - formString

Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and
directives per default in the same syntax group.

A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between
header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program.  To activate
this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file >

:let form_enhanced_color=1

The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark
gvim display.  Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and
conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction.

FORTRAN					*fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax*

Default highlighting and dialect ~
Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default.  This choice
should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is
almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77).

Fortran source code form ~
Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form.  Note that the
syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set.

When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source
form.  If you always use free source form, then >
    :let fortran_free_source=1
in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command.  If you always use fixed source
form, then >
    :let fortran_fixed_source=1
in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command.

If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file
extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin
file.  For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this
will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax
on" command in your .vimrc file.

When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free
source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes
fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set.  If
neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to
determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension
using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale
compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for
free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five
columns of the first 500 lines of your file.  If no signs of free source form
are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form.  The
algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases.  In some cases, such as a
file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may
incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form.  If that happens,
just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns
of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file.

Tabs in fortran files ~
Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards.  Tabs are not a good idea in
fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries.
Therefore, tabs are marked as errors.  Nevertheless, some programmers like
using tabs.  If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the
variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as >
    :let fortran_have_tabs=1
placed prior to the :syntax on command.  Unfortunately, the use of tabs will
mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins.

Syntax folding of fortran files ~
If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable
fortran_fold with a command such as >
    :let fortran_fold=1
to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that
is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function
subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules.  If you
also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as >
    :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1
then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select
case constructs.  If you also set the variable
fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as >
    :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1
then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment
lines.  Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files.

If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or
fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if
you set foldmethod=syntax.  Comments or blank lines placed between two program
units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program
unit.

More precise fortran syntax ~
If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as >
    :let fortran_more_precise=1
then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower.  In particular,
statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be
recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall
construct.

Non-default fortran dialects ~
The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably
find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory.  A few legacy constructs
deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo
items.

If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that
other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and
that free source form will be assumed.

The dialect can be selected in various ways.  If all your fortran files use
the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior
to your syntax on statement.  The case-sensitive, permissible values of
fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F".  Invalid values of fortran_dialect are
ignored.

If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to
set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file.  For more information on
ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|.  For example, if all your fortran files with
an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should
contain the code >
    let s:extfname = expand("%:e")
    if s:extfname ==? "f90"
	let b:fortran_dialect="F"
    else
	unlet! b:fortran_dialect
    endif
Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command
precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file.

Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify
the dialect.  You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis,
by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or
f08) in one of the first three lines in your file.  For example, your older .f
files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would
identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a
Fortran comment of the form >
  ! fortran_dialect=F

For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the
now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be
silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F"
instead.

The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to
comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some
non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted
or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo
items.

Limitations ~
Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses.  Hollerith
strings are not recognized.  Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly
because Fortran90 has no reserved words.

For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and
|ft-fortran-plugin|.

FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES			*fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax*

In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match
the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns
appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file.  For these
patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version
number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm.

For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/
as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: >

:au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/*  let b:fvwm_version = 2 |
					 \ set filetype=fvwm

If you'd like Vim to highlight all valid color names, tell it where to
find the color database (rgb.txt) on your system.  Do this by setting
"rgb_file" to its location.  Assuming your color database is located
in /usr/X11/lib/X11/, you should add the line >

:let rgb_file = "/usr/X11/lib/X11/rgb.txt"

to your .vimrc file.

GSP						*gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax*

htmlString
    htmlValue
    htmlEndTag
    htmlTag
    htmlTagN

Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline
java code, but in some special cases it may not.  To add another HTML
group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight
correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava
to the contains clause.

The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError
group to make them easier to see.

GROFF						*groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax*

HASKELL			     *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax*

The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate
Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style.  The Haskell
syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives.

If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a
light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: >
	:let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1
To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers,
add: >
	:let hs_highlight_boolean = 1
To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: >
	:let hs_highlight_types = 1
And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: >
	:let hs_highlight_more_types = 1
If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in
your .vimrc: >
	:let hs_highlight_debug = 1

The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor
directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid
directives as erroneous.  This interferes with Haskell's syntax for
operators, as they may start with #.  If you want to highlight those
as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: >
	:let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1

The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to
automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains
TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs
or nothing at all.  You can override this globally by putting
in your .vimrc >
	:let lhs_markup = none
for no highlighting at all, or >
	:let lhs_markup = tex
to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup.
For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of
this variable, so e.g. >
	:let b:lhs_markup = tex
will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer.  It has to be
set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or
loading a file.

HTML						*html.vim* *ft-html-syntax*

The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows.

The  <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
defined for you)

Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C.  Unknown tag
names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which
makes it easy to spot errors

Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names.  Known attribute
names are colored differently than unknown ones.

Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text.  The following tags
are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>,
while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but
only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in
<A href="somefile.html">).

If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
following syntax groups:

- htmlBold
    - htmlBoldUnderline
    - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic
    - htmlUnderline
    - htmlUnderlineItalic
    - htmlItalic
    - htmlTitle for titles
    - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings

To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception
of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the
following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
are read during initialization) >
	:let html_my_rendering=1

If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at
http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html

You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
vimrc file: >
	:let html_no_rendering=1

HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the
details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors.
However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with ) you can define >
	:let html_wrong_comments=1

JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as
'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard
programming languages.  Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently
supported, no other scripting language has been added yet.

Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too.

There are several html preprocessor languages out there.  html.vim has been
written such that it should be trivial to include it.  To do so add the
following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language
(the example comes from the asp.vim file):

runtime! syntax/html.vim
    syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp

Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain
the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc.

HTML/OS (by Aestiva)				*htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax*

The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows:

Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM
doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers.  To change
this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a
different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: >
  :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray

Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose.

Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to
signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding.	You can change this by opening
a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: >
  :set syntax=htmlos

Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a
block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively.

IA64				*ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax*

Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language.  See |asm.vim| for
how to recognize this filetype.

To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: >
	:let g:filetype_inc = "ia64"

INFORM						*inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax*

Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as
most programs make extensive use of it.  If do not wish Library symbols
to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: >
	:let inform_highlight_simple=1

By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted,
and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately.  If
you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you
need to add this to your startup sequence: >
	:let inform_highlight_glulx=1

This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the
set of highlighted system functions.

The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when
it encounters them.  These keywords are normally highlighted as errors
by Vim.  To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your
startup sequence: >
	:let inform_suppress_obsolete=1

By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler
version 6.30 and Library version 6.11.  If you are using an older
Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your
startup sequence: >
	:let inform_highlight_old=1

IDL							*idl.vim* *idl-syntax*

IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls.  In
Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls.

IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to
rather than using a few heuristics.  The result is large and somewhat
repetitive but seems to work.

There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here.  Some of them
are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions.

The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions.

Variable			Effect ~

idl_no_ms_extensions		Disable some of the Microsoft specific
				extensions
idl_no_extensions		Disable complex extensions
idlsyntax_showerror		Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but
				quite helpful)
idlsyntax_showerror_soft	Use softer colours by default for errors

JAVA						*java.vim* *ft-java-syntax*

The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options:

In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was
flagged as an error.  Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous
classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error.  If you prefer the old
way, put the following line into your vim startup file: >
	:let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1

All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes.  To
highlight them use: >
	:let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1

You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you
download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html.
If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io
use the following: >
	:let java_highlight_java_io=1
Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported.

Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on
how you write Java code.  The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight
functions:

If you write function declarations that are always indented by either
a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set >
	:let java_highlight_functions="indent"
However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are
supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use >
	:let java_highlight_functions="style"
If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function
declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the
definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the
original one and then adds the code to highlight functions.

In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should
only be used for debugging.  Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging
statements differently.  To do this you must add the following definition in
your startup file: >
	:let java_highlight_debug=1
The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special'
characters.  If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define
new highlightings for the following groups.:
    Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType
which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug
strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively.  I
have opted to chose another background for those statements.

Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and
creates HTML pages.  The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code
similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|).  You can even add Javascript
and CSS inside this code (see below).  There are four differences however:
  1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by
     some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change
     the color change the group CommentTitle).
  2. The text is colored as 'Comment'.
  3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special'
  4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials
     and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function.
To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: >
	:let java_ignore_javadoc=1

If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you
can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic
scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets).  This makes only sense if you
actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded
CSS.  The options to use are >
	:let java_javascript=1
	:let java_css=1
	:let java_vb=1

In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors
for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with >
	:hi link javaParen Comment
or >
	:hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff

If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable
to a larger number: >
	:let java_minlines = 50
This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
displayed line.  The default value is 10.  The disadvantage of using a larger
number is that redrawing can become slow.

LACE						*lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax*

Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the
style guide lines are not.  If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just
define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: >
	:let lace_case_insensitive=1

LEX						*lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax*

Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter
gives no clue as to what section follows.  Consequently, the value for >
	:syn sync minlines=300
may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization
difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files).

LIFELINES				*lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax*

To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: >

:let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1
<

LISP						*lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax*

The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: >

g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted
			  as if the contents of the string were lisp.
			  Useful for AutoLisp.
	g:lisp_rainbow  : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels
			  of parenthesization will receive different
			  highlighting.
<
The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for
the parentheses and backquoted parentheses.  Because of the quantity of
colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode
specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the
usual colorscheme control using standard highlighting groups.  The actual
highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting  (see |'bg'|).

LITE						*lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax*

There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting.

If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >

:let lite_sql_query = 1

For syncing, minlines defaults to 100.	If you prefer another value, you can
set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire.  Example: >

:let lite_minlines = 200

LPC						*lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax*

LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensj| C.  The
file name of LPC is usually *.c.  Recognizing these files as LPC would bother
users writing only C programs.	If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you
should set a variable in your .vimrc file: >

:let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1

If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a
modeline.  For a LPC file:

// vim:set ft=lpc:

For a C file that is recognized as LPC:

// vim:set ft=c:

If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file.

There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely
used ones.  Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22
and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also
assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when
you are using the latest version of MudOS: >

:let lpc_pre_v22 = 1

For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: >

:let lpc_compat_32 = 1

For LPC4 series of LPC: >

:let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1

For uLPC series of LPC:
uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax
instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike

LUA						*lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax*

The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is
the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables
lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua
5.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this:

:let lua_version = 5
	:let lua_subversion = 1

MAIL						*mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim*

Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures,
quoted text and URLs / email addresses).  In keeping with standard conventions,
signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by
whitespaces and end with a newline.

Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>'
as quoted text.  However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text
only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space).

By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first
displayed line.  If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails
with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: >

:let mail_minlines = 30

MAKE						*make.vim* *ft-make-syntax*

In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot
errors.  However, this may be too much coloring for you.  You can turn this
feature off by using: >

:let make_no_commands = 1

MAPLE						*maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax*

Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra.  The language
supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user.
The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be
highlighted at the user's discretion.  Users may place in their .vimrc file: >

:let mvpkg_all= 1

to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by
choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to
1, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing
$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim).

Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors >
  mv_DEtools	 mv_genfunc	mv_networks	mv_process
  mv_Galois	 mv_geometry	mv_numapprox	mv_simplex
  mv_GaussInt	 mv_grobner	mv_numtheory	mv_stats
  mv_LREtools	 mv_group	mv_orthopoly	mv_student
  mv_combinat	 mv_inttrans	mv_padic	mv_sumtools
  mv_combstruct mv_liesymm	mv_plots	mv_tensor
  mv_difforms	 mv_linalg	mv_plottools	mv_totorder
  mv_finance	 mv_logic	mv_powseries

MATHEMATICA		*mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax*

Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you
have the following in your .vimrc: >

let filetype_m = "mma"

MOO						*moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax*

If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your
highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style
comments: >

:let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1

To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: >

:let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1

To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching
'%(' and '%)' inside strings: >

:let moo_no_regexp = 1

Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: >

:let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1

To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): >

:let moo_builtin_properties = 1

Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors.  If you
use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group.
To enable this option: >

:let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1

An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: >

:syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained

MSQL						*msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax*

There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting.

If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >

:let msql_sql_query = 1

For syncing, minlines defaults to 100.	If you prefer another value, you can
set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire.  Example: >

:let msql_minlines = 200

N1QL						*n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax*

N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in
Couchbase Server databases.

Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments,
and special values.  Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its
many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL.

NCF						*ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax*

There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting.

If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as
errors, use this: >

:let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1

If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset.

NROFF						*nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax*

The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box.  You need to
activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you
can use them.

For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text
processing package.  In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting
features for groff, add the following option to your start-up files: >

:let b:nroff_is_groff = 1

Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in
Solaris.  Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and
there are extensions to the language primitives.  For example, in AT&T troff
you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr.  In groff you
can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's
native syntax, \[yr].  Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly:
\[year].  Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm
accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim
environments.

In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should
follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation.

1. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines.

2. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period,
   exclamation mark, etc.

3. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a
   carriage return.

The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking
algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above.

Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and,
furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and
vertical space input will be output as is.

Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences
than you intend to have in your final document.  For this reason, the common
practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation
marks.  If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you
need to maintain regular spacing in the input text.  To mark both trailing
spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: >

:let nroff_space_errors = 1

Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere
with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching
highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and
"nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files.  For example: >

hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse
  hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold
			 \ gui=reverse,bold

If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as
with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc
file: >

let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1

As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended
paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package.

Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling
groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default.

OCAML						*ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax*

The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml,
.mli, .mll and .mly.  By setting the following variable >

:let ocaml_revised = 1

you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported
by the camlp4 preprocessor.  Setting the variable >

:let ocaml_noend_error = 1

prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources
contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore.

PAPP						*papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax*

The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extend, .pxml
and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml
as the top-level file format.  By default everything inside phtml or pxml
sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands.  If
you set the variable: >

:let papp_include_html=1

in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml
sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to
edit sensibly. ;)

The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at
http://papp.plan9.de.

PASCAL						*pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax*

Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal.  If the automatic detection
doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
startup vimrc: >

:let filetype_p = "pascal"

The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions
provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler.
Delphi keywords are also supported.  By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are
enabled.  If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the
following line to your startup file: >

:let pascal_traditional=1

To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments,
keywords, etc): >

:let pascal_delphi=1

The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +,
*, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not.  To colorize symbol
operators, add the following line to your startup file: >

:let pascal_symbol_operator=1

Some functions are highlighted by default.  To switch it off: >

:let pascal_no_functions=1

Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers.  Besides
pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc.  Default extensions try to
match Turbo Pascal. >

:let pascal_gpc=1

or >

:let pascal_fpc=1

To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the
pascal_one_line_string variable. >

:let pascal_one_line_string=1

If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable.  Tabs
will be highlighted as Error. >

:let pascal_no_tabs=1

PERL						*perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax*

There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting.

Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default.  If you don't wish
to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl
files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: >

:let perl_include_pod = 0

To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch
off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. >

To handle package references in variable and function names not differently
from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): >

:let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1

(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables"
enabled it.)

If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: >

:let perl_no_extended_vars = 1

(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.)

The coloring strings can be changed.  By default strings and qq friends will be
highlighted like the first line.  If you set the variable
perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line.

"hello world!"; qq|hello world|;
   ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N	  (unlet perl_string_as_statement)
   S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN	  (let perl_string_as_statement)

(^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all)

The syncing has 3 options.  The first two switch off some triggering of
synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly.
If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely
then you should try and switch off one of those.  Let me know if you can figure
out the line that causes the mistake.

One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. >

:let perl_no_sync_on_sub
	:let perl_no_sync_on_global_var

Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for
its attempts in syntax highlighting. >

:let perl_sync_dist = 100

If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: >

:let perl_fold = 1

If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: >

:let perl_fold_blocks = 1

Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set.  If you do not want
this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': >

:let perl_nofold_subs = 1

Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding
via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': >

:let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1

Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set.  To disable this
behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': >

:let perl_nofold_packages = 1

PHP3 and PHP4		*php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax*

[note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4
it has been renamed to "php"]

There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting.

If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: >

let php_sql_query = 1

For highlighting the Baselib methods: >

let php_baselib = 1

Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: >

let php_htmlInStrings = 1

Using the old colorstyle: >

let php_oldStyle = 1

Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: >

let php_asp_tags = 1

Disable short tags: >

let php_noShortTags = 1

For highlighting parent error ] or ): >

let php_parent_error_close = 1

For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing
one: >

let php_parent_error_open = 1

Enable folding for classes and functions: >

let php_folding = 1

Selecting syncing method: >

let php_sync_method = x

x = -1 to sync by search (default),
x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards,
x = 0 to sync from start.

PLAINTEX				*plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax*

TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain"
variant of TeX.  If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX,
see |ft-tex-plugin|.

This syntax file has the option >

let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1

if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}".

PPWIZARD					*ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax*

PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files

This syntax file has the options:

- ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's
  definitions.  Possible values are

ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the
    colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables)

ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate
    statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line
    continuation symbols

The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1.

- ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal
  HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text.

PHTML						*phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax*

There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting.

If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >

:let phtml_sql_query = 1

For syncing, minlines defaults to 100.	If you prefer another value, you can
set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire.  Example: >

:let phtml_minlines = 200

POSTSCRIPT				*postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax*

There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript.

First which version of the PostScript language to highlight.  There are
currently three defined language versions, or levels.  Level 1 is the original
and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2.
Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of
extensions prior to the release of level 3.  Level 3 is currently the highest
level supported.  You select which level of the PostScript language you want
highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: >

:let postscr_level=2

If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is
the most prevalent version currently.

Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a
particular language level.  In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of
PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript!

If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of
Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as
follows: >

:let postscr_display=1

If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of
Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable
postscr_ghostscript as follows: >

:let postscr_ghostscript=1

PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements.	While it
useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can
cause Vim to slow down.  In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and
character encodings are not highlighted by default.  Unless you are working
explicitly with either of these this should be ok.  If you want them to be
highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: >

:let postscr_fonts=1
	:let postscr_encodings=1

There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not.  In
PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their
operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators,
if they are integers then they are binary operators.  As binary and logical
operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way
or the other.  By default they are treated as logical operators.  They can be
highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable
postscr_andornot_binary as follows: >

:let postscr_andornot_binary=1
<

*ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax*
PRINTCAP + TERMCAP	*ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax*

This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases.

In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match
the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns
appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file.  For these
patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or
"term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap.

For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap
files, add the following: >

:au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" |
				       \ set filetype=ptcap

If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which
are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines"
internal variable to a larger number: >

:let ptcap_minlines = 50

(The default is 20 lines.)

PROGRESS				*progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax*

Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb.  If the automatic detection
doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your
startup vimrc: >
   :let filetype_w = "progress"
The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be
Pascal.  Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: >
   :let filetype_i = "progress"
   :let filetype_p = "progress"

PYTHON						*python.vim* *ft-python-syntax*

There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting.

For highlighted numbers: >
	:let python_no_number_highlight = 1

For highlighted builtin functions: >
	:let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1

For highlighted standard exceptions: >
	:let python_no_exception_highlight = 1

For highlighted doctests and code inside: >
	:let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1
or >
	:let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1
(first option implies second one).

For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: >
	:let python_space_error_highlight = 1

If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the
preceding last option and unsetting all other ones): >
	:let python_highlight_all = 1

Note: only existence of these options matter, not their value. You can replace
      1 above with anything.

QUAKE						*quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax*

The Quake syntax definition should work for most any FPS (First Person
Shooter) based on one of the Quake engines.  However, the command names vary
a bit between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the
syntax definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow
users to specify what commands are legal in their files.  The three variables
can be set for the following effects:

set to highlight commands only available in Quake: >
	:let quake_is_quake1 = 1

set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: >
	:let quake_is_quake2 = 1

set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: >
	:let quake_is_quake3 = 1

Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more
commands than are actually available to you by the game.

READLINE				*readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax*

The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a
few commands and options to the ones already available.  To highlight these
items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the
command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: >
	let readline_has_bash = 1

This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and
later, and part earlier) adds.

RESTRUCTURED TEXT			*rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax*

You may set what syntax definitions should be used for code blocks via >
	let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...]
<

REXX						*rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax*

If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable
to a larger number: >
	:let rexx_minlines = 50
This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
displayed line.  The default value is 10.  The disadvantage of using a larger
number is that redrawing can become slow.

Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is.  If it can't be detected (from
comment lines), the default is "r".  To make the default rexx add this line to
your .vimrc:  *g:filetype_r*
>
	:let g:filetype_r = "r"

RUBY						*ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax*

*ruby_operators*
 Ruby: Operator highlighting ~

Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": >

:let ruby_operators = 1
<
						*ruby_space_errors*
 Ruby: Whitespace errors ~

Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": >

:let ruby_space_errors = 1
<
This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character
as errors.  This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and
"ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after
spaces respectively.

*ruby_fold* *ruby_foldable_groups*
 Ruby: Folding ~

Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": >

:let ruby_fold = 1
<
This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current
buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby
filetypes.

Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do",
"%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels.

You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: >

:let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %'
<
The value is a space-separated list of keywords:

keyword       meaning ~
    --------  ------------------------------------- ~
    ALL        Most block syntax (default)
    NONE       Nothing
    if         "if" or "unless" block
    def        "def" block
    class      "class" block
    module     "module" block
    do         "do" block
    begin      "begin" block
    case       "case" block
    for        "for", "while", "until" loops
    {          Curly bracket block or hash literal
    [          Array literal
    %          Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING!
    /          Regexp
    string     String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `)
    :          Symbol
    #          Multiline comment
    <<         Here documents
    __END__    Source code after "__END__" directive

*ruby_no_expensive*
 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~

By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement
of the block it closes.  While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you
experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support)
you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: >

:let ruby_no_expensive = 1
<
In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords.

*ruby_minlines*

If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while
scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting
the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: >

:let ruby_minlines = 100
<
Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your
largest class or module.

*ruby_spellcheck_strings*
 Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~

Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define
"ruby_spellcheck_strings": >

:let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1
<

SCHEME						*scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax*

By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.

scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler.
Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.

SDL						*sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax*

The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many
of them it's almost impossibly to cope.

The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are
case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be
used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase.  To have the
highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: >
	:let sdl_2000=1

This also sets many new keywords.  If you want to disable the old
keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: >
	:let SDL_no_96=1

The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very
satisfied with it for my own projects.

SED						*sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax*

To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo
highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting >

:let highlight_sedtabs = 1

in the vimrc file.  (This special highlighting only applies for tabs
inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included
by an Append/Change/Insert command.)  If you enable this option, it is
also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that,
you can easily count the number of tabs in a string.

Bugs:

The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute
  command.  This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned,
  transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong.
  (Transform accepts no flags.)  I tolerate this bug because the
  involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for
  each plausible pattern delimiter).

SGML						*sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax*

The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows.

The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
defined for you)

Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C.  Unknown tag
names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors.

Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names.  Known attribute
names are colored differently than unknown ones.

Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text.  The following tags
are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal>
<replaceable> <ulink> and <link>.

If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
following syntax groups:

- sgmlBold
    - sgmlBoldItalic
    - sgmlUnderline
    - sgmlItalic
    - sgmlLink for links

To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the
following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
are read during initialization) >
   let sgml_my_rendering=1

You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
vimrc file: >
   let sgml_no_rendering=1

(Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>)

*ft-posix-synax* *ft-dash-syntax*
SH		*sh.vim*  *ft-sh-syntax*  *ft-bash-syntax*  *ft-ksh-syntax*

This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer
shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells.

Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that
various filenames are of specific types: >

ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh
    bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash
<
If none of these cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined
(ex. looking for /bin/sh  /bin/ksh  /bin/bash).  If the first line specifies a
shelltype, then that shelltype is used.  However some files (ex. .profile) are
known to be shell files but the type is not apparent.  Furthermore, on many
systems sh is symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh"
(Posix).

One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following
variables in your <.vimrc>:

ksh: >
	let g:is_kornshell = 1
<   posix:  (using this is the nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) >
	let g:is_posix     = 1
<   bash: >
	let g:is_bash	   = 1
<   sh: (default) Bourne shell >
	let g:is_sh	   = 1

<   (dash users should use posix)

If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a
default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume
the Bourne shell syntax.  No need to quote RFCs or market penetration
statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the
sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>.

The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: >

let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0     (default, no syntax folding)
	let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1     (enable function folding)
	let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2     (enable heredoc folding)
	let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4     (enable if/do/for folding)
>
then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become
syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|).  You also may add these together
to get multiple types of folding: >

let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3     (enables function and heredoc folding)

If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed
when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable
to a larger number.  Example: >

let sh_minlines = 500

This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first
displayed line.  The default value is 200.  The disadvantage of using a larger
number is that redrawing can become slow.

If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow.	To
reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set.  Example: >

let sh_maxlines = 100
<
The default is to use the twice sh_minlines.  Set it to a smaller number to
speed up displaying.  The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear.

syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like
extra ']'s, 'done's, 'fi's, etc.  If you find the error handling problematic
for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting
the following line in your .vimrc: >

let g:sh_no_error= 1
<

*sh-embed*  *sh-awk*
 Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~

You may wish to embed languages into sh.  I'll give an example courtesy of
Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >

" AWK Embedding:
    " ==============
    " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
    if exists("b:current_syntax")
      unlet b:current_syntax
    endif
    syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim
    syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained
    syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode
    syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded
    hi def link AWKCommand Type
<
This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: >
	awk '...awk code here...'
be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax.  Clearly this may be
extended to other languages.

SPEEDUP						*spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax*
(AspenTech plant simulator)

The Speedup syntax file has some options:

- strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for
  sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not
  other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section).

- highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types
  like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a
  plain Identifier.  Included are the types that are usually found in
  the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include
  them in the syntax file.

- oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the
  highlighting of # style comments.

oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even
  number of #s.

oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as
  error.  This is the default setting.

oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains
  more than one #.

Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to
PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical.  If your computer is
fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of
the syntax file.

SQL						*sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax*
				*sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax*
				*sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax*

While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own
custom extensions.  Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of
SQL.  Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default.

Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax
scripts.  You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL
supported types.  You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a
buffer by buffer basis.

For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|.

TCSH						*tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax*

This covers the shell named "tcsh".  It is a superset of csh.  See |csh.vim|
for how the filetype is detected.

Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable
is set.  If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add
this line to your .vimrc: >

:let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0

If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable
to a larger number: >

:let tcsh_minlines = 1000

This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first
displayed line.  If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then
synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for
tcsh_minlines is 100.  The disadvantage of using a larger number is that
redrawing can become slow.

TEX				*tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* *latex-syntax*

*tex-folding* *g:tex_fold_enabled*
 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~

As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters,
sections, subsections, etc are supported.  Put >
	let g:tex_fold_enabled=1
in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax.  I suggest doing the latter via a
modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: >
	% vim: fdm=syntax
If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into >
	https://vimhelp.appspot.com/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7
<
						*g:tex_nospell*
 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~

If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put >
	let g:tex_nospell=1
into your .vimrc.  If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside
comments only, see |g:tex_comment_nospell|.

*tex-nospell* *g:tex_comment_nospell*
 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~

Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would
prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files.  To do
this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
      let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1
If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document,
see |g:tex_nospell|.

*tex-verb* *g:tex_verbspell*
 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~

Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does
one want source code spell-checked.  However, for those of you who do
want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
	let g:tex_verbspell= 1
<
					*tex-runon* *tex-stopzone*
 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~

The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX.  The
highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and
texMathZone.  Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones
terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized
as there's no difference between start and end patterns.  Consequently, a
special "TeX comment" has been provided >
	%stopzone
which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a
texMathZone.

*tex-slow* *tex-sync*
 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~

If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for >
	:syn sync maxlines=200
	:syn sync minlines=50
(especially the latter).  If your computer is fast, you may wish to
increase them.	This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group,
if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?).

Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see
|tex-folding| for a way around this.

*g:tex_fast*

Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set >

:let g:tex_fast= ""

in your .vimrc.  Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax
highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated
synchronization.  The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the
price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based
folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking.

You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table
selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: >

b : allow bold and italic syntax
    c : allow texComment syntax
    m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...])
    M : allow texMath syntax
    p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax
    r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref)
    s : allow superscript/subscript regions
    S : allow texStyle syntax
    v : allow verbatim syntax
    V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax
<
As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting
but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting.
(also see: |g:tex_conceal| and |tex-supersub|)

*tex-morecommands* *tex-package*
 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~

LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full
of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts.  If you're using such a
package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support
it.  However, clearly this is impractical.  So please consider using the
techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided
by syntax/tex.vim.  Please consider uploading any extensions that you write,
which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to
http://vim.sf.net/.

*tex-error* *g:tex_no_error*
 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~

The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts.  Thus,
although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate
errors where none actually are.  If this proves to be a problem for you,
you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: >
	let g:tex_no_error=1
and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed.

*tex-math*
 Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~

If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following
code shows you an example as to how you might do so: >
	call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform)
You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix
(currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself).
As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: >
	call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1)
You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group,
and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim.
The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group
has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*).

*tex-style* *b:tex_stylish*
 Tex: Starting a New Style? ~

One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in
commands available.  However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the
following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag
such use of @ as an error.  To solve this: >

:let b:tex_stylish = 1
	:set ft=tex

Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim>
always accept such use of @.

*tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal*
 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~

If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a
number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs,
including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and
superscripts and subscripts in MathZones.  Not all characters can be made into
superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports.
In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts.

*g:tex_conceal*
 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~

You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your
<.vimrc>.  By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment
for the following sets of characters: >

a = accents/ligatures
	b = bold and italic
	d = delimiters
	m = math symbols
	g = Greek
	s = superscripts/subscripts
<
By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character
substitution will not be made.

*g:tex_isk* *g:tex_stylish*
 Tex: Controlling iskeyword~

Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex
keywords don't support the underscore - except when in *.sty files.  The
syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic:

* If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1
		then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
		will be allowed as part of keywords
		(regardless of g:tex_isk)
	* Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx,
		then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
		will be allowed as part of keywords
		(regardless of g:tex_isk)

* If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword'
	* Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255

*tex-supersub* *g:tex_superscripts* *g:tex_subscripts*
 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~

See |tex-conceal| for how to enable concealed character replacement.

See |g:tex_conceal| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic,
	math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts.

One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one
	wants syntax-based concealment for (see |:syn-cchar|).  Since not all
	fonts support all characters, one may override the
	concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: >

let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]"
	    let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]"
<
	For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript
	characters for "hklmnpst", so I put >
		let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]"
<	in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable
	utf-8 glyphs appear.

TF						*tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax*

There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting.

For syncing, minlines defaults to 100.	If you prefer another value, you can
set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire.  Example: >

:let tf_minlines = your choice
<
VIM			*vim.vim*		*ft-vim-syntax*
			*g:vimsyn_minlines*	*g:vimsyn_maxlines*
There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen
updating speed.  To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the
g:vimsyn_minlines variable.  The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to
improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). >

g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines
	g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines
<
	(g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of
	these two options)

*g:vimsyn_embed*
The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of
embedded script highlighting they wish to have. >

g:vimsyn_embed == 0   : don't support any embedded scripts
   g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua
   g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme
   g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl
   g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python
   g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby
   g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl
<
By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim
itself supports.  Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types
of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme
and embedded perl.
						*g:vimsyn_folding*

Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >

g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding
   g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups
   g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions
   g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua      script
   g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script
   g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl     script
   g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python   script
   g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby     script
   g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl      script
<
							*g:vimsyn_noerror*
Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script
is a difficult language to highlight correctly.  A way to suppress error
highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: >

let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1
<

XF86CONFIG				*xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax*

The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x.  Both
variants are supported.  Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect.
You may need to specify the version manually.  Set the variable
xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in
your .vimrc.  Example: >
	:let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3
When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable.

Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported.  Use
"SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name
highlighted.

XML						*xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax*

Xml namespaces are highlighted by default.  This can be inhibited by
setting a global variable: >

:let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1
<
							*xml-folding*
The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between
start and end tags.  This can be turned on by >

:let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1
	:set foldmethod=syntax

Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly,
especially for large files.

X Pixmaps (XPM)					*xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax*

xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the
XPM file.  Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings,
you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm".

To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it
somewhere else with "P".

Do you want to draw with the mouse?  Try the following: >
   :function! GetPixel()
   :   let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
   :   echo c
   :   exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c
   :   exe "noremap <LeftDrag>	<LeftMouse>r".c
   :endfunction
   :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR>
   :set guicursor=n:hor20	   " to see the color beneath the cursor
This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen.
It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you
must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it.

It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: >
	:set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-*

YAML						*yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax*

*g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema*
A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving 
non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on 
plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string 
and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point, 
integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values 
will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are

Schema		Description ~
failsafe	No additional highlighting.
json		Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null.
core		Supports more number, boolean and null styles.
pyyaml		In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps, 
		but there are some differences in what is recognized as 
		numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core 
		schema.

Default schema is `core`.

Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the 
only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only 
difference defined in the syntax file.

ZSH						    *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax*

The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: >

:let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1

==============================================================================
5. Defining a syntax					*:syn-define* *E410*

Vim understands three types of syntax items:

1. Keyword
   It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword'
   option.  It cannot contain other syntax items.  It will only match with a
   complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match).
   The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because
   "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is.

2. Match
   This is a match with a single regexp pattern.

3. Region
   This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match
   with the "end" regexp pattern.  Any other text can appear in between.  A
   "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern.

Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP.	For a syntax group
you can give highlighting attributes.  For example, you could have an item
to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment,
and put them both in the "Comment" group.  You can then specify that a
"Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color.  You are free to make
one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group.
This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes.  Putting
each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting
for a lot of groups.

Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar.  For a highlight
group you will have given highlight attributes.  These attributes will be used
for the syntax group with the same name.

In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was
defined LAST wins.  Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by
using an item that matches the same text.  But a keyword always goes before a
match or region.  And a keyword with matching case always goes before a
keyword with ignoring case.

PRIORITY						*:syn-priority*

When several syntax items may match, these rules are used:

1. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item
   defined last has priority.
2. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items.
3. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that
   start in later positions.

DEFINING CASE						*:syn-case* *E390*

:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore]
	This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with
	matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using
	"ignore".  Note that any items before this are not affected, and all
	items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected.

:sy[ntax] case
	Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore" (translated).

SPELL CHECKING						*:syn-spell*

:sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default]
	This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not
	in a syntax item:

toplevel:	Text is spell checked.
	notoplevel:	Text is not spell checked.
	default:	When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking.

For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters
	|spell-syntax|.  When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then
	spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel".

To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set.

:sy[ntax] spell
	Show either "syntax spell toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or
	"syntax spell default" (translated).

SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING				*:syn-iskeyword*

:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}]
	This defines the keyword characters.  It's like the 'iskeyword' option
	for but only applies to syntax highlighting.

clear:		Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the
			buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used.
	{option}        Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value.

Example: >
  :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_
<
	This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all
	alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented
	characters and also includes the "_" and the "$".

If no argument is given, the current value will be output.

Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns
	and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new
	match.

It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to
	set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change
	the 'iskeyword' option.

DEFINING KEYWORDS					*:syn-keyword*

:sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}]

This defines a number of keywords.

{group-name}	Is a syntax group name such as "Comment".
	[{options}]	See |:syn-arguments| below.
	{keyword} ..	Is a list of keywords which are part of this group.

Example: >
  :syntax keyword   Type   int long char
<
	The {options} can be given anywhere in the line.  They will apply to
	all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword.
	These examples do exactly the same: >
  :syntax keyword   Type   contained int long char
  :syntax keyword   Type   int long contained char
  :syntax keyword   Type   int long char contained
<								*E789* *E890*
	When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in
	Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the
	variations at once: >
  :syntax keyword   vimCommand	 ab[breviate] n[ext]
<
	Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the
	characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option.  If one character
	isn't, the keyword will never be recognized.
	Multi-byte characters can also be used.  These do not have to be in
	'iskeyword'.
	See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings.

A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the
	keyword is used if more than one item matches.	Keywords do not nest
	and a keyword can't contain anything else.

Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even
	one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it.  Use a match
	instead.

The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters.

The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment
	differs.  For example, you can define the keyword once not contained
	and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different
	highlight group.  Example: >
  :syn keyword vimCommand tag
  :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag
<	When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand"
	highlight group is used.  When finding "tag" in a syntax item that
	contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used.

DEFINING MATCHES					*:syn-match*

:sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}]
		[excludenl]
		[keepend]
		{pattern}
		[{options}]

This defines one match.

{group-name}		A syntax group name such as "Comment".
	[{options}]		See |:syn-arguments| below.
	[excludenl]		Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
				extend a containing match or region.  Must be
				given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl|
	keepend			Don't allow contained matches to go past a
				match with the end pattern.  See
				|:syn-keepend|.
	{pattern}		The search pattern that defines the match.
				See |:syn-pattern| below.
				Note that the pattern may match more than one
				line, which makes the match depend on where
				Vim starts searching for the pattern.  You
				need to make sure syncing takes care of this.

Example (match a character constant): >
  :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1
<

DEFINING REGIONS	*:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end*
							*E398* *E399*
:sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}]
		[matchgroup={group-name}]
		[keepend]
		[extend]
		[excludenl]
		start={start_pattern} ..
		[skip={skip_pattern}]
		end={end_pattern} ..
		[{options}]

This defines one region.  It may span several lines.

{group-name}		A syntax group name such as "Comment".
	[{options}]		See |:syn-arguments| below.
	[matchgroup={group-name}]  The syntax group to use for the following
				start or end pattern matches only.  Not used
				for the text in between the matched start and
				end patterns.  Use NONE to reset to not using
				a different group for the start or end match.
				See |:syn-matchgroup|.
	keepend			Don't allow contained matches to go past a
				match with the end pattern.  See
				|:syn-keepend|.
	extend			Override a "keepend" for an item this region
				is contained in.  See |:syn-extend|.
	excludenl		Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
				extend a containing match or item.  Only
				useful for end patterns.  Must be given before
				the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl|
	start={start_pattern}	The search pattern that defines the start of
				the region.  See |:syn-pattern| below.
	skip={skip_pattern}	The search pattern that defines text inside
				the region where not to look for the end
				pattern.  See |:syn-pattern| below.
	end={end_pattern}	The search pattern that defines the end of
				the region.  See |:syn-pattern| below.

Example: >
  :syntax region String   start=+"+  skip=+\\"+  end=+"+
<
	The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order.
	There can be zero or one skip pattern.	There must be one or more
	start and end patterns.  This means that you can omit the skip
	pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern.  It
	is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign
	(although it mostly looks better without white space).

When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these
	is sufficient.	This means there is an OR relation between the start
	patterns.  The last one that matches is used.  The same is true for
	the end patterns.

The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern.
	Offsets are not used for this.	This implies that the match for the
	end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern.

The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the
	search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what
	you want.  The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in
	the next line.	Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble.

Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start
	pattern.  There is no check for a matching end pattern.  This does NOT
	work: >
		:syn region First  start="("  end=":"
		:syn region Second start="("  end=";"
<	The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has
	higher priority).  The Second region then continues until the next
	';', no matter if there is a ':' before it.  Using a match does work: >
		:syn match First  "(\_.\{-}:"
		:syn match Second "(\_.\{-};"
<	This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and
	repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible).

*:syn-keepend*
	By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern.
	This is useful for nesting.  For example, a region that starts with
	"{" and ends with "}", can contain another region.  An encountered "}"
	will then end the contained region, but not the outer region:
	    {		starts outer "{}" region
		{	starts contained "{}" region
		}	ends contained "{}" region
	    }		ends outer "{} region
	If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching
	of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item.
	This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for
	contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing
	that to skip the match with the end pattern.  Example: >
  :syn match  vimComment +"[^"]\+$+
  :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend
<	The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line,
	even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>.

When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried
	after each contained match.  When "keepend" is included, the first
	encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any
	contained matches.
							*:syn-extend*
	The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument.
	When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses
	"keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be
	extended.
	This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while
	others don't.  Example: >

:syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript
   :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained
   :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend

<	Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue
	further, it is only used to highlight the <> items.  The htmlScript
	item does extend the htmlRef item.

Another example: >
   :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend
<	This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be
	changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to
	highlight it differently.  But when the xmlFold region is nested (it
	includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested
	region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in.

*:syn-excludenl*
	When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$'
	to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is
	contained in continue on the next line.  For example, a match with
	"\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue
	that would normally stop at the end of the line.  This is the default
	behavior.  If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it:
	1. Use "keepend" for the containing item.  This will keep all
	   contained matches from extending the match or region.  It can be
	   used when all contained items must not extend the containing item.
	2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item.  This will keep that match
	   from extending the containing match or region.  It can be used if
	   only some contained items must not extend the containing item.
	   "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to.

*:syn-matchgroup*
	"matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern
	differently than the body of the region.  Example: >
  :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+  skip=+\\"+	end=+"+
<	This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in
	between with the "String" group.
	The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow,
	until the next "matchgroup".  Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not
	using a matchgroup.

In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the
	contained items of the region are not used.  This can be used to avoid
	that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match.  When
	using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern
	match that is highlighted with "matchgroup".

Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in
	different colors: >
   :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2
   :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained
   :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained
   :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red
   :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue
   :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
<
						*E849*
The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999.

==============================================================================
6. :syntax arguments					*:syn-arguments*

The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments.
The common ones are explained here.  The arguments may be given in any order
and may be mixed with patterns.

Not all commands accept all arguments.	This table shows which arguments
can not be used for all commands:
							*E395*
		    contains  oneline	fold  display  extend concealends~
:syntax keyword		 -	 -	 -	 -	 -      -
:syntax match		yes	 -	yes	yes	yes     -
:syntax region		yes	yes	yes	yes	yes    yes

These arguments can be used for all three commands:
	conceal
	cchar
	contained
	containedin
	nextgroup
	transparent
	skipwhite
	skipnl
	skipempty

conceal						*conceal* *:syn-conceal*

When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable.
Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the
'conceallevel' option.  The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether
concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to
edit the line.
Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|.

concealends						*:syn-concealends*

When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of
the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable.
Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the
'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately
in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup"

cchar							*:syn-cchar*
							*E844*
The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item
when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal
argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal
character defined in the 'listchars' option is used.  The character cannot be
a control character such as Tab.  Example: >
   :syntax match Entity "&amp;" conceal cchar=&
See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting.

contained						*:syn-contained*

When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at
the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of
another match.	Example: >
   :syntax keyword Todo    TODO    contained
   :syntax match   Comment "//.*"  contains=Todo

display							*:syn-display*

If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the
detected highlighting will not be displayed.  This will speed up highlighting,
by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is
to be displayed.

Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these
conditions:
- The item does not continue past the end of a line.  Example for C: A region
  for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next
  line.
- The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or
  make it continue on the next line.
- The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in.  Example
  for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display",
  because it may make that preprocessor match shorter.
- The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise,
  and that item may extend the match too far.  Example for C: A match for a
  "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would
  match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line.

Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used:
- match with a number
- match with a label

transparent						*:syn-transparent*

If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted
itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in.	This
is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used
only to skip over a part of the text.

The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in,
unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself.	To
avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE".  Example, which
highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": >
	:syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim
	:syn match myWord   /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained
	:syn match myVim    /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE
	:hi link myString String
	:hi link myWord   Comment
Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last
match in the same position overrules an earlier one).  The "transparent"
argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString".  But
it does not contain anything.  If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left
out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow
"myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Constant.  This
happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same
position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here.

When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained
items.	The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you
see the contained item.  When a contained item is transparent, you can look
through, thus you see the item it is contained in.  In a picture:

look from here

xxxx	  yyy		more contained items
	    ....................	contained item (transparent)
	=============================	first item

The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item.  The '.' represent a
transparent group.

What you see is:

=======xxxx=======yyy========

Thus you look through the transparent "....".

oneline							*:syn-oneline*

The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line
boundary.  It must match completely in the current line.  However, when the
region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on
the next line anyway.  A contained item can be used to recognize a line
continuation pattern.  But the "end" pattern must still match in the first
line, otherwise the region doesn't even start.

When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end
pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends.  The
end pattern may also include an end-of-line.  Thus the "oneline" argument
means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must
be within one line.  This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a
line break.

fold							*:syn-fold*

The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item.
Example: >
   :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold
   :syn sync fromstart
   :set foldmethod=syntax
This will make each {} block form one fold.

The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item
ends.  If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold.
The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds.
{not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}

*:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409*
contains={group-name},..

The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names.  These
groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the
containing group's end).  This allows for recursive nesting of matches and
regions.  If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in
this item.  The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used
here.

contains=ALL
		If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all
		groups will be accepted inside the item.

contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},..
		If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all
		groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that
		are listed.  Example: >
  :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function

contains=TOP
		If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all
		groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained"
		argument.
contains=TOP,{group-name},..
		Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed.

contains=CONTAINED
		If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then
		all groups will be accepted that have the "contained"
		argument.
contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},..
		Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are
		listed.

The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern.  All group names
that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used).
The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','.  Example: >
   ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3]
The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed.  Groups
that are defined later will not be matched.  Also, if the current syntax
command defines a new group, it is not matched.  Be careful: When putting
syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because
the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the
group names.

The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a
region.  If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used
|:syn-matchgroup|.  The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the
region where contained items do match.	Note that this may also limit the
area that is highlighted

containedin={group-name}...				*:syn-containedin*

The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names.  The
item will be allowed to begin inside these groups.  This works as if the
containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item.

The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above.

This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards.  An item can be told to
be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition
of that item.  For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading
the C syntax: >
	:syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained
Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top
level.

Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can
appear.  A "contains" argument may also be added as usual.  Don't forget that
keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't
work.

nextgroup={group-name},..				*:syn-nextgroup*

The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names,
separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns).

If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be
tried for a match, after the match or region ends.  If none of the groups have
a match, highlighting continues normally.  If there is a match, this group
will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the
current group.	This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all
other groups.  Example: >
   :syntax match  ccFoobar  "Foo.\{-}Bar"  contains=ccFoo
   :syntax match  ccFoo     "Foo"	    contained nextgroup=ccFiller
   :syntax region ccFiller  start="."  matchgroup=ccBar  end="Bar"  contained

This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a
"Bar" after "Foo".  In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for
highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. >

Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf
   fff	       bbb	fff	 bbb

Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar.
when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be
highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match
would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|).

skipwhite						*:syn-skipwhite*
skipnl							*:syn-skipnl*
skipempty						*:syn-skipempty*

These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup".	They can be
used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text:
	skipwhite	skip over space and tab characters
	skipnl		skip over the end of a line
	skipempty	skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl")

When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no
next group that matches the white space.

When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next
line.  This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current
line!  When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after
the current item in the same line.

When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other
groups are ignored.  Only when no next group matches, other items are tried
for a match again.  This means that matching a next group and skipping white
space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items.

Example: >
  :syn match ifstart "\<if.*"	  nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty
  :syn match ifline  "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained
  :syn match ifline  "endif"	contained
Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text.  Thus it would also
match "endif".	Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes
precedence.
Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s.  You need to add
"contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the
example).

IMPLICIT CONCEAL					*:syn-conceal-implicit*

:sy[ntax] conceal [on|off]
	This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords,
	matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal
	on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region"
	defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal
	off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be
	given explicitly.

:sy[ntax] conceal
	Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off" (translated).

==============================================================================
7. Syntax patterns				*:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402*

In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical
characters.  This is like it works for the ":s" command.  The most common to
use is the double quote.  But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can
use another character that is not used in the pattern.	Examples: >
  :syntax region Comment  start="/\*"  end="\*/"
  :syntax region String   start=+"+    end=+"+	 skip=+\\"+

See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is.  Syntax patterns are
always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual
value of 'magic' is.  And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is
not included in 'cpoptions'.  This was done to make syntax files portable and
independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings.

Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*".
This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere.

*:syn-pattern-offset*
The pattern can be followed by a character offset.  This can be used to
change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the
match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items).	Both
are relative to the matched pattern.  The character offset for a skip
pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern.

The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}"
The {what} can be one of seven strings:

ms	Match Start	offset for the start of the matched text
me	Match End	offset for the end of the matched text
hs	Highlight Start	offset for where the highlighting starts
he	Highlight End	offset for where the highlighting ends
rs	Region Start	offset for where the body of a region starts
re	Region End	offset for where the body of a region ends
lc	Leading Context	offset past "leading context" of pattern

The {offset} can be:

s	start of the matched pattern
s+{nr}	start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
s-{nr}	start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
e	end of the matched pattern
e+{nr}	end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
e-{nr}	end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
{nr}	(for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start

Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3".

Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always
meaningful.  This table shows which offsets are actually used:

ms	 me   hs   he	rs   re	  lc ~
match item	    yes  yes  yes  yes	-    -	  yes
region item start   yes  -    yes  -	yes  -	  yes
region item skip    -	 yes  -    -	-    -	  yes
region item end     -	 yes  -    yes	-    yes  yes

Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between.  Example: >
  :syn match String  /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1
<
    some "string" text
	  ^^^^^^		highlighted

Notes:
- There must be no white space between the pattern and the character
  offset(s).
- The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text.
- A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end
  pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped.
- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters.
  This didn't work well for multi-byte characters, so it was changed with the
  Vim 7.2 release.
- The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern
  matched.  This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e.  You can make the highlighting
  start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e.

Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): >
  :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1
<
	/* this is a comment */
	  ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^	  highlighted

A more complicated Example: >
  :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1
<
	 abcfoostringbarabc
	    mmmmmmmmmmm	    match
	      sssrrreee	    highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar")

Leading context			*:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context*

Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility
with previous Vim versions.  It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct
in the pattern.

The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must
be present, but is not considered part of the match.  An offset of "lc=n" will
cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing
characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be
used as leading context for this match.  This can be used, for instance, to
specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: >

:syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1
  :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1
  :syn match Underline "_\+"
<
	  ___zzzz ___wwww
	  ^^^	  ^^^	  matches Underline
	      ^ ^	  matches ZNoBackslash
		     ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash

The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset,
unless you set "ms" explicitly.

Multi-line patterns					*:syn-multi-line*

The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line.	Mostly this works as
expected, but there are a few exceptions.

When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not
allowed to start in a following line.  The highlighting can start in a
following line though.  Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of
the match doesn't move to another line.

The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will
continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is
matched by the skip pattern.  This is because redrawing may start in any line
halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a
previous line.	For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern
is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: >
	 x x a
	 b x x
Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters
after the "\n".

External matches					*:syn-ext-match*

These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns:

*/\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* *E879*
    \z(\)	Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be
		accessed from another pattern match.  Currently only usable in
		defining a syntax region start pattern.

*/\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5*
    \z1  ...  \z9			*/\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67*
		Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding
		sub-expression in a previous start pattern match.

Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common
sub-expression.  A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix
shells.  This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression
items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be
referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined.  The here-document
example, for instance, can be done like this: >
  :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$"

As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty.	In the start pattern,
it marks the "$\I\i*$" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it
changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the
first external sub-expression in the start pattern.  External references can
also be used in skip patterns: >
  :syn region foo start="start $\I\i*$" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1"

Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and
indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)$..$" is applied
to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa".
Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references
within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions.  If you want to use one
sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest
the two, as in "$\z(...$\)".

Note that only matches within a single line can be used.  Multi-line matches
cannot be referred to.

==============================================================================
8. Syntax clusters					*:syn-cluster* *E400*

:sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..]
				 [add={group-name}..]
				 [remove={group-name}..]

This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a
single name.

contains={group-name}..
		The cluster is set to the specified list of groups.
	add={group-name}..
		The specified groups are added to the cluster.
	remove={group-name}..
		The specified groups are removed from the cluster.

A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=..,
nextgroup=.., add=..  or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix.  You can also use
this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents.

Example: >
   :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers
   :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2

As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively
retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so
to speak: >
   :syntax keyword A aaa
   :syntax keyword B bbb
   :syntax cluster AandB contains=A
   :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB
   :syntax cluster AandB add=B	  " now both keywords are matched in Stuff

This also has implications for nested clusters: >
   :syntax keyword A aaa
   :syntax keyword B bbb
   :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B
   :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup
   :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup
   :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B	" no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup
   :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B	" now bbb isn't matched within Stuff
<
						*E848*
The maximum number of clusters is 9767.

==============================================================================
9. Including syntax files				*:syn-include* *E397*

It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for
a related language.  Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in
two different ways:

- If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
	  allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use
	  the |:runtime| command: >

" In cpp.vim:
  :runtime! syntax/c.vim
  :unlet b:current_syntax

<	- If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
	  contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the
	  ":syntax include" command:

:sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name}

All syntax items declared in the included file will have the
	  "contained" flag added.  In addition, if a group list is specified,
	  all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to
	  that list. >

" In perl.vim:
   :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim
   :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod
<
	  When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR"
	  or "<sfile>") that file is sourced.  When it is a relative path
	  (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'.
	  All matching files are loaded.  Using a relative path is
	  recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file
	  with his own version, without replacing the file that does the ":syn
	  include".

*E847*
The maximum number of includes is 999.

==============================================================================
10. Synchronizing				*:syn-sync* *E403* *E404*

Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document.  To
make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where
redrawing starts.

:sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...]

There are four ways to synchronize:
1. Always parse from the start of the file.
   |:syn-sync-first|
2. Based on C-style comments.  Vim understands how C-comments work and can
   figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment.
   |:syn-sync-second|
3. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there.
   |:syn-sync-third|
4. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on.
   |:syn-sync-fourth|

*:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines*
For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is
limited by "minlines" and "maxlines".

If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least
that many lines backwards.  This can be used if the parsing may take a few
lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing.

If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched
for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after
adding "minlines").  This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a
slow machine.  Example: >
   :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment
<
						*:syn-sync-linebreaks*
When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may
cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line.	This means has to
start above where the change was made.	How many lines can be specified with
the "linebreaks" argument.  For example, when a pattern may include one line
break use this: >
   :syntax sync linebreaks=1
The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a
change was made.  The default value for "linebreaks" is zero.  Usually the
value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks".

First syncing method:			*:syn-sync-first*
>
   :syntax sync fromstart

The file will be parsed from the start.  This makes syntax highlighting
accurate, but can be slow for long files.  Vim caches previously parsed text,
so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time.  However,
when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst
case: to the end of the file).

Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number.

Second syncing method:			*:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment*

For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given.
Example: >
   :syntax sync ccomment

When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style
comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be
used.  This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"!
An alternate group name can be specified, for example: >
   :syntax sync ccomment javaComment
This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be
used for the detected C comment region.  This only works properly if that
region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/".

The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of
lines.	The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of
lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few
lines, but it hard to sync on).

Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used
that cross a line and contain a "*/".  Since letting strings cross a line
is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the
chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction
is hardly ever noticed.

Third syncing method:				*:syn-sync-third*

For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given.
Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there.  This
means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower.
Example: >
   :syntax sync minlines=50

"lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions).

Fourth syncing method:				*:syn-sync-fourth*

The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a
sync pattern.  Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some
region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are.  The search
starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts.  From there
the search continues backwards in the file.

This works just like the non-syncing syntax items.  You can use contained
matches, nextgroup, etc.  But there are a few differences:
- Keywords cannot be used.
- The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group
  of syntax items.  You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups.
- The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of
  forwards.
- A line continuation pattern can be given.  It is used to decide which group
  of lines need to be searched like they were one line.  This means that the
  search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the
  consecutive that contain the continuation pattern.
- When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or
  group of continued lines).
- When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of
  continued lines).  Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the
  line (or group of continued lines).
- When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of
  continued lines) is searched for another match.  The last match is used.
  This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region
  (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used).

There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used:
1. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the
   search for the sync pattern started).  The syntax group that is expected
   to be valid there must be specified.  This works well when the regions
   that cross lines cannot contain other regions.
2. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match.  The syntax group
   that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified.
   This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well.  It's much
   slower, because more text needs to be parsed.
Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time.

Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to
avoid finding unwanted matches.

[The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the
search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the
highlighting.  The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much)
faster.]

*syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394*
    :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" ..

Define a match that is used for syncing.  {group-name} is the
	name of a syntax group that follows just after the match.  Parsing
	of the text for highlighting starts just after the match.  A region
	must exist for this {group-name}.  The first one defined will be used.
	"NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match.

*syn-sync-groupthere*
    :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" ..

Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that
	is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync
	point started.	The text between the match and the start of the sync
	pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting.
	For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/".  If
	"/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the
	"groupthere" is "cComment".  If "*/" is found first, you know that you
	are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE".  (in practice
	it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear
	inside a string.  That's left as an exercise to the reader...).

:syntax sync match ..
    :syntax sync region ..

Without a "groupthere" argument.  Define a region or match that is
	skipped while searching for a sync point.

*syn-sync-linecont*
    :syntax sync linecont {pattern}

When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in
	the next line.	This means that the search for a sync point will
	consider the lines to be concatenated.

If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are
searched for a match is restricted to N.  This is useful if you have very
few things to sync on and a slow machine.  Example: >
   :syntax sync maxlines=100

You can clear all sync settings with: >
   :syntax sync clear

You can clear specific sync patterns with: >
   :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} ..

==============================================================================
11. Listing syntax items		*:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list*

This command lists all the syntax items: >

:sy[ntax] [list]

To show the syntax items for one syntax group: >

:sy[ntax] list {group-name}

To list the syntax groups in one cluster:			*E392*	 >

:sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name}

See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command.

Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn"
is mostly used, because it looks better.

==============================================================================
12. Highlight command			*:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415*

There are three types of highlight groups:
- The ones used for specific languages.  For these the name starts with the
  name of the language.  Many of these don't have any attributes, but are
  linked to a group of the second type.
- The ones used for all syntax languages.
- The ones used for the 'highlight' option.
							*hitest.vim*
You can see all the groups currently active with this command: >
    :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim
This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed
in their own color.

*:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185*
:colo[rscheme]		Output the name of the currently active color scheme.
			This is basically the same as >
				:echo g:colors_name
<			In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will
			output "default".  When compiled without the |+eval|
			feature it will output "unknown".

:colo[rscheme] {name}	Load color scheme {name}.  This searches 'runtimepath'
			for the file "colors/{name}.vim".  The first one that
			is found is loaded.
			Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below
			"start" and then under "opt".

Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
			":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.

To customize a colorscheme use another name, e.g.
			"~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load
			the original colorscheme: >
				runtime colors/evening.vim
				hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue

<			After the color scheme has been loaded the
			|ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered.
			For info about writing a colorscheme file: >
				:edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt

:hi[ghlight]		List all the current highlight groups that have
			attributes set.

:hi[ghlight] {group-name}
			List one highlight group.

:hi[ghlight] clear	Reset all highlighting to the defaults.  Removes all
			highlighting for groups added by the user!
			Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which
			default colors to use.

:hi[ghlight] clear {group-name}
:hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE
			Disable the highlighting for one highlight group.  It
			is _not_ set back to the default colors.

:hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} ..
			Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for
			an existing group.
			See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments.
			See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default]
			argument.

Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up.  This sets the
default values for the highlighting.  After that, you can use additional
highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default
values.  The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to
the default value.

A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command.  This loads
a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: >

:hi Comment	gui=bold

Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the
specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones.  So, the
result is like this single command has been used: >
   :hi Comment	term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold
<
							*:highlight-verbose*
When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will
also tell where it was last set.  Example: >
	:verbose hi Comment
<	Comment        xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~
	   Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~

When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be
mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.

*highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423*
There are three types of terminals for highlighting:
term	a normal terminal (vt100, xterm)
cterm	a color terminal (MS-DOS console, color-xterm, these have the "Co"
	termcap entry)
gui	the GUI

For each type the highlighting can be given.  This makes it possible to use
the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.

1. highlight arguments for normal terminals

*bold* *underline* *undercurl*
					*inverse* *italic* *standout*
					*nocombine* *strikethrough*
term={attr-list}			*attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
	attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
	following items (in any order):
		bold
		underline
		undercurl	not always available
		strikethrough	not always available
		reverse
		inverse		same as reverse
		italic
		standout
		nocombine	override attributes instead of combining them
		NONE		no attributes used (used to reset it)

Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font.  They
	have the same effect.
	"undercurl" is a curly underline.  When "undercurl" is not possible
	then "underline" is used.  In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough"
	is only available in the GUI.  The color is set with |highlight-guisp|.

start={term-list}				*highlight-start* *E422*
stop={term-list}				*term-list* *highlight-stop*
	These lists of terminal codes can be used to get
	non-standard attributes on a terminal.

The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument
	is written before the characters in the highlighted
	area.  It can be anything that you want to send to the
	terminal to highlight this area.  The escape sequence
	specified with the "stop" argument is written after the
	highlighted area.  This should undo the "start" argument.
	Otherwise the screen will look messed up.

The {term-list} can have two forms:

1. A string with escape sequences.
	   This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with
	   "t_" and blanks are not allowed.  The <> notation is recognized
	   here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>".  Example:
		start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r;

2. A list of terminal codes.
	   Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of
	   the termcap entry.  The codes have to be separated with commas.
	   White space is not allowed.	Example:
		start=t_C1,t_BL
	   The terminal codes must exist for this to work.

2. highlight arguments for color terminals

cterm={attr-list}					*highlight-cterm*
	See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|.
	The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when
	colors are used.  For example, in a normal terminal comments could
	be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue.
	Note: Many terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes
	with coloring.	Use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg=" OR "ctermbg=".

ctermfg={color-nr}				*highlight-ctermfg* *E421*
ctermbg={color-nr}				*highlight-ctermbg*
	The {color-nr} argument is a color number.  Its range is zero to
	(not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co".
	The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal
	and its settings.  Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of
	"cterm".  For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives
	another color, on others you just get color 3.

For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit
	unpredictable.	See your xterm documentation for the defaults.	The
	colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file.
	Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors
	for each user.	See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms.

The MSDOS standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so these
	have been used for the names.  But the meaning of color names in X11
	are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the
	highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?).  The
	following names are recognized, with the color number used:

*cterm-colors*
	    NR-16   NR-8    COLOR NAME ~
	    0	    0	    Black
	    1	    4	    DarkBlue
	    2	    2	    DarkGreen
	    3	    6	    DarkCyan
	    4	    1	    DarkRed
	    5	    5	    DarkMagenta
	    6	    3	    Brown, DarkYellow
	    7	    7	    LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey
	    8	    0*	    DarkGray, DarkGrey
	    9	    4*	    Blue, LightBlue
	    10	    2*	    Green, LightGreen
	    11	    6*	    Cyan, LightCyan
	    12	    1*	    Red, LightRed
	    13	    5*	    Magenta, LightMagenta
	    14	    3*	    Yellow, LightYellow
	    15	    7*	    White

The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co'
	greater than or equal to 16).  The number under "NR-8" is used for
	8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16).  The '*' indicates that the
	bold attribute is set for ctermfg.  In many 8-color terminals (e.g.,
	"linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear.  This doesn't work
	for background colors!	Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed.
	If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a
	"cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument.	Or use
	a number instead of a color name.

The case of the color names is ignored.
	Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the
	numbers in the NR-8 column is used.  Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue
	is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc.

Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong
	colors!

You can also use "NONE" to remove the color.

*:hi-normal-cterm*
	When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group,
	these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text.
	Example: >
		:highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue
<	When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the
	'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the
	condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set
	explicitly.  This causes the highlight groups that depend on
	'background' to change!  This means you should set the colors for
	Normal first, before setting other colors.
	When a colorscheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to
	be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal).  First
	delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this.

When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim
	needs to reset the color when exiting.	This is done with the "op"
	termcap entry |t_op|.  If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the
	't_op' option in your .vimrc.
							*E419* *E420*
	When Vim knows the normal foreground and background colors, "fg" and
	"bg" can be used as color names.  This only works after setting the
	colors for the Normal group and for the MS-DOS console.  Example, for
	reverse video: >
	    :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg
<	Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this
	command are given.  If the Normal group colors are changed later, the
	"fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted.

3. highlight arguments for the GUI

gui={attr-list}						*highlight-gui*
	These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode.
	See |attr-list| for a description.
	Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font.  They
	have the same effect.
	Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group.

font={font-name}					*highlight-font*
	font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim
	runs on.  For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: >
   font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1
<
	The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font.
	When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default
	font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is
	used).
	The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs:
	When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed.
	When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be
	changed.
	All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same
	character size as the default font!  Otherwise redrawing problems will
	occur.
	To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character,
	put it in single quotes.  The single quote cannot be used then.
	Example: >
	    :hi comment font='Monospace 10'

guifg={color-name}					*highlight-guifg*
guibg={color-name}					*highlight-guibg*
guisp={color-name}					*highlight-guisp*
	These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special
	(guisp) color to use in the GUI.  "guisp" is used for undercurl and
	strikethrough.
	There are a few special names:
		NONE		no color (transparent)
		bg		use normal background color
		background	use normal background color
		fg		use normal foreground color
		foreground	use normal foreground color
	To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character,
	put it in single quotes.  The single quote cannot be used then.
	Example: >
	    :hi comment guifg='salmon pink'
<
							*gui-colors*
	Suggested color names (these are available on most systems):
	    Red		LightRed	DarkRed
	    Green	LightGreen	DarkGreen	SeaGreen
	    Blue	LightBlue	DarkBlue	SlateBlue
	    Cyan	LightCyan	DarkCyan
	    Magenta	LightMagenta	DarkMagenta
	    Yellow	LightYellow	Brown		DarkYellow
	    Gray	LightGray	DarkGray
	    Black	White
	    Orange	Purple		Violet

In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available.  See
	|win32-colors|.

You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values.
	The format is "#rrggbb", where
		"rr"	is the Red value
		"gg"	is the Green value
		"bb"	is the Blue value
	All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff".  Examples: >
  :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff
<
					*highlight-groups* *highlight-default*
These are the default highlighting groups.  These groups are used by the
'highlight' option default.  Note that the highlighting depends on the value
of 'background'.  You can see the current settings with the ":highlight"
command.
							*hl-ColorColumn*
ColorColumn	used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn'
							*hl-Conceal*
Conceal		placeholder characters substituted for concealed
		text (see 'conceallevel')
							*hl-Cursor*
Cursor		the character under the cursor
							*hl-CursorIM*
CursorIM	like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM|
							*hl-CursorColumn*
CursorColumn	the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is
		set
							*hl-CursorLine*
CursorLine	the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is
		set
							*hl-Directory*
Directory	directory names (and other special names in listings)
							*hl-DiffAdd*
DiffAdd		diff mode: Added line |diff.txt|
							*hl-DiffChange*
DiffChange	diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt|
							*hl-DiffDelete*
DiffDelete	diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt|
							*hl-DiffText*
DiffText	diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt|
							*hl-EndOfBuffer*
EndOfBuffer	filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer.
		By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|.
							*hl-ErrorMsg*
ErrorMsg	error messages on the command line
							*hl-VertSplit*
VertSplit	the column separating vertically split windows
							*hl-Folded*
Folded		line used for closed folds
							*hl-FoldColumn*
FoldColumn	'foldcolumn'
							*hl-SignColumn*
SignColumn	column where |signs| are displayed
							*hl-IncSearch*
IncSearch	'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with
		":s///c"
							*hl-LineNr*
LineNr		Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number'
		or 'relativenumber' option is set.
							*hl-CursorLineNr*
CursorLineNr	Like LineNr when 'cursorline' or 'relativenumber' is set for
		the cursor line.
							*hl-MatchParen*
MatchParen	The character under the cursor or just before it, if it
		is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt|

*hl-ModeMsg*
ModeMsg		'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
							*hl-MoreMsg*
MoreMsg		|more-prompt|
							*hl-NonText*
NonText		'@' at the end of the window, characters from 'showbreak'
		and other characters that do not really exist in the text
		(e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't
		fit at the end of the line).
							*hl-Normal*
Normal		normal text
							*hl-Pmenu*
Pmenu		Popup menu: normal item.
							*hl-PmenuSel*
PmenuSel	Popup menu: selected item.
							*hl-PmenuSbar*
PmenuSbar	Popup menu: scrollbar.
							*hl-PmenuThumb*
PmenuThumb	Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar.
							*hl-Question*
Question	|hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
							*hl-QuickFixLine*
QuickFixLine	Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window.
							*hl-Search*
Search		Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch').
		Also used for similar items that need to stand out.
							*hl-SpecialKey*
SpecialKey	Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
		to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'.
		Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it
		really is.
							*hl-SpellBad*
SpellBad	Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell|
		This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
							*hl-SpellCap*
SpellCap	Word that should start with a capital. |spell|
		This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
							*hl-SpellLocal*
SpellLocal	Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
		used in another region. |spell|
		This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
							*hl-SpellRare*
SpellRare	Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
		hardly ever used. |spell|
		This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
							*hl-StatusLine*
StatusLine	status line of current window
							*hl-StatusLineNC*
StatusLineNC	status lines of not-current windows
		Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in
		the status line of the current window.
							*hl-StatusLineTerm*
StatusLineTerm	status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window.
							*hl-StatusLineTermNC*
StatusLineTermNC   status lines of not-current windows that is a |terminal|
		window.
							*hl-TabLine*
TabLine		tab pages line, not active tab page label
							*hl-TabLineFill*
TabLineFill	tab pages line, where there are no labels
							*hl-TabLineSel*
TabLineSel	tab pages line, active tab page label
							*hl-Terminal*
Terminal	|terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|)
							*hl-Title*
Title		titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
							*hl-Visual*
Visual		Visual mode selection
							*hl-VisualNOS*
VisualNOS	Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection".
		Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this.
							*hl-WarningMsg*
WarningMsg	warning messages
							*hl-WildMenu*
WildMenu	current match in 'wildmenu' completion

*hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9*
The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the
statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat').  The names are User1 to User9.

For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu,
scrollbars and tooltips.  They don't have defaults.  This doesn't work for the
Win32 GUI.  Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg,
and guifg.

*hl-Menu*
Menu		Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus.
		Also used for the toolbar.
		Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.

NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
		specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
		empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
		set.

*hl-Scrollbar*
Scrollbar	Current background and foreground of the main window's
		scrollbars.
		Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg.

*hl-Tooltip*
Tooltip		Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips.
		Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.

NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
		specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
		empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
		set.

==============================================================================
13. Linking groups		*:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413*

When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you
can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight
group, and give the color attributes only for that group.

To set a link:

:hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group}

To remove a link:

:hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE

Notes:							*E414*
- If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created.  You
  don't get an error message for a non-existing group.
- As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is
  removed.
- If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is
  not made, unless the '!' is given.  For a ":highlight link" command in a
  sourced file, you don't get an error message.  This can be used to skip
  links for groups that already have settings.

*:hi-default* *:highlight-default*
The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a
group.	If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command
will be ignored.  Also when there is an existing link.

Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a
specific syntax file.  For example, the C syntax file contains: >
	:highlight default link cComment Comment
If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: >
	:highlight link cComment Question
Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be
overruled when the syntax file is loaded.

==============================================================================
14. Cleaning up						*:syn-clear* *E391*

If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this
command: >
  :syntax clear

This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting,
or when you want to switch to using another syntax.  It's normally not needed
in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that
load the syntax file.
The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is
loaded after this command.

If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove
the autocommands that load the syntax files: >
  :syntax off

What this command actually does, is executing the command >
  :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details.  Note that for this to work
$VIMRUNTIME must be valid.  See |$VIMRUNTIME|.

To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: >
  :syntax clear {group-name} ..
This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}.

To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: >
  :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} ..
This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list.

*:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset*
If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the
defaults back: >

:syntax reset

It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only
affects the highlighting.

This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option.

Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset
back to their Vim default.
Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color
scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost.

What this actually does is: >

let g:syntax_cmd = "reset"
	runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim

Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option.

*syncolor*
If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim
script file to set these colors.  Put this file in a directory in
'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule
the default colors.  This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax
reset" command.

For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim.  Example: >

if &background == "light"
	  highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
	else
	  highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green
	endif

*E679*
Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the
'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an
endless loop.

Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether
your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme.  This
depends on the color scheme file.  See |:colorscheme|.

*syntax_cmd*
The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the
syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded:
   "on"		":syntax on" command.  Highlight colors are overruled but
		links are kept
   "enable"	":syntax enable" command.  Only define colors for groups that
		don't have highlighting yet.  Use ":syntax default".
   "reset"	":syntax reset" command or loading a color scheme.  Define all
		the colors.
   "skip"	Don't define colors.  Used to skip the default settings when a
		syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set
		them.

==============================================================================
15. Highlighting tags					*tag-highlight*

If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following
mappings.

<F11>	-- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags.
	<F12>	-- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file.
>
  :map <F11>  :sp tags<CR>:%s/^$[^	:]*:$\=$[^	]*$.*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12>
  :map <F12>  :so tags.vim<CR>

WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more
memory Vim will consume.

Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too.  For this you
must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net).

Put these lines in your Makefile:

# Make a highlight file for types.  Requires Exuberant ctags and awk
types: types.vim
types.vim: *.[ch]
	ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\
		awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\
			{printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@

And put these lines in your .vimrc: >

" load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists
   autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim'
   autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname)
   autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch]   exe 'so ' . fname
   autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif

==============================================================================
16. Window-local syntax				*:ownsyntax*

Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is
possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own
private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source
with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source
highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold,
italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here.

To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other
windows on the buffer: >
   :ownsyntax foo
<						*w:current_syntax*
This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo".  The value of
"b:current_syntax" does not change.  This is implemented by saving and
restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set
"b:current_syntax".  The value set by the syntax file is assigned to
"w:current_syntax".
Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options.

Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows
on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely,
syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the
same buffer.

A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer
is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded.
When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax.

==============================================================================
17. Color xterms				*xterm-color* *color-xterm*

Most color xterms have only eight colors.  If you don't get colors with the
default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: >
   :if &term =~ "xterm"
   :  if has("terminfo")
   :	set t_Co=8
   :	set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm
   :	set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm
   :  else
   :	set t_Co=8
   :	set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
   :	set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
   :  endif
   :endif
<	[<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]

You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal,
e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm".

Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on".  Otherwise the colors may
be wrong.
							*xiterm* *rxvt*
The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too.
But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: >
	:set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm
	:set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm
<
							*colortest.vim*
To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution.
To use it, execute this command: >
   :runtime syntax/colortest.vim

Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can
output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined
at 8.  Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground
colors, when 't_Co' is 8.

*xfree-xterm*
To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be
included with XFree86 3.3 and later).  You can also find the latest version
at: >
	http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html
Here is a good way to configure it.  This uses 88 colors and enables the
termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it
supports. >
	./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query
If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings.
(Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding).

This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): >
   :if has("terminfo")
   :  set t_Co=16
   :  set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm
   :  set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm
   :else
   :  set t_Co=16
   :  set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
   :  set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
   :endif
<	[<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]

Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically
translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm".
Colors above 16 are also translated automatically.

For 256 colors this has been reported to work: >

:set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm
   :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm

Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color"
and try if that works.

You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file):
	XTerm*color0:			#000000
	XTerm*color1:			#c00000
	XTerm*color2:			#008000
	XTerm*color3:			#808000
	XTerm*color4:			#0000c0
	XTerm*color5:			#c000c0
	XTerm*color6:			#008080
	XTerm*color7:			#c0c0c0
	XTerm*color8:			#808080
	XTerm*color9:			#ff6060
	XTerm*color10:			#00ff00
	XTerm*color11:			#ffff00
	XTerm*color12:			#8080ff
	XTerm*color13:			#ff40ff
	XTerm*color14:			#00ffff
	XTerm*color15:			#ffffff
	Xterm*cursorColor:		Black

[Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the
cursor color to the color of the last drawn text.  This has been fixed by a
newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.]

To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database
Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): >
  xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults
<
					*xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor*
To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c.  Or use Thomas
Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with
these resources:
	XTerm*cursorBlink:	on
	XTerm*cursorOnTime:	400
	XTerm*cursorOffTime:	250
	XTerm*cursorColor:	White

*hpterm-color*
These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8
foreground colors: >
   :if has("terminfo")
   :  set t_Co=8
   :  set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS
   :  set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
   :else
   :  set t_Co=8
   :  set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS
   :  set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
   :endif
<	[<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]

*Eterm* *enlightened-terminal*
These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal
emulator, or Eterm.  They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the
bold attribute to get bright colors.  Add an ":if" like above when needed. >
       :set t_Co=16
       :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m
       :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m
<
						*TTpro-telnet*
These settings should work for TTpro telnet.  Tera Term Pro is a freeware /
open-source program for MS-Windows. >
	set t_Co=16
	set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm
	set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm
Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure
that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled.
(info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>)

==============================================================================
18. When syntax is slow						*:syntime*

This is aimed at authors of a syntax file.

If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it
faster.  To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such
as 'relativenumber' and |folding|.

Note: this is only available when compiled with the |+profile| feature.
You many need to build Vim with "huge" features.

To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this
sequence: >
	:syntime on
	[ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ]
	:syntime report

This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time
it took to match them against the text.

:syntime on		Start measuring syntax times.  This will add some
			overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern
			matching.

:syntime off		Stop measuring syntax times.

:syntime clear		Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring.

:syntime report		Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the
			current window.  Use a wider display to see more of
			the output.

The list is sorted by total time. The columns are:
			TOTAL		Total time in seconds spent on
					matching this pattern.
			COUNT		Number of times the pattern was used.
			MATCH		Number of times the pattern actually
					matched
			SLOWEST		The longest time for one try.
			AVERAGE		The average time for one try.
			NAME		Name of the syntax item.  Note that
					this is not unique.
			PATTERN		The pattern being used.

Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives.  Try to
include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a
pattern does NOT match.

When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at
all positions in the current and previous line.  For example, if the item is
literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes):

"<\@<=span"	Matches "span" in "<span".  This tries matching with "<" in
		many places.
"<\@1<=span"	Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span".

vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

Back